Episode 222: How To Safeguard Your Content with Copyright Protection – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 14, 12:00 Eastern time Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

Those who want to know how to file for and use copyright protection. 


In this episode we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course or content creator, and you have work that is not protected, this is an urgent episode for you. We dive into who needs copyright protection, what you must be careful to do when hiring help to create works for you, and how to start the process of protecting your work. 
This is part 2 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 1 we dove into Trademark protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you have work that needs to be protected
  2. Understand how to own the work that others create for you
  3. Have the first steps to file for copyright protection today

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back. So the show April beach here, host of this show and founder of this wheat life company. I’m so glad that you’ve joined us again. This is part two of a two part series that we’re doing with our special guests,


Francesca Whitesburg. Last week, we dove in to trademarking protection who needs trademarking, the difference between word marketing and design marking. And so if you miss that, please pause this show, go back and start with last week of that is an area of need in your business. That was episode number 221. And today this is episode number 222. This episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business development in that stage is connected to our start to scale up system.


If you don’t know what phase of business development you’re in, we have an amazing, powerful, free resource for you where you can take a short assessment and get the exact stage and phase of business development you’re in and get a complete list of what you should be working on right now. And you can get that short assessment and access all of those tools by visiting Sweetlife co.com


forward slash quiz. If you haven’t done that, or if it’s been a while, since you’ve tested where you are in your business growth phase, I highly recommend you tap into that amazing resource. Now let’s talk about what we can expect from today’s show. So this episode is for those of you who want to know how to step into the process of protecting your creative work through filing for copyright protection,


our guest is absolutely hands down amazing. She has done work for our company and many of our clients, and I’m so pleased that she agreed to be on this show. Today, we are talking with the trademarking attorney, Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course creator,


if you’re a content creator, if you have work that you have actually built, brought to life in tangible form and you have not protected it yet, we need you to be very careful. That is your creative work. That is your genius, and you need to protect it so nobody else can take it from you. And so we’re talking about how to go about that in today’s show clearly a very important show for our audience.


Now, the end of this episode, you’re going to know if you have work that needs to be protected. You’re going to know the process of going through the first steps to filing for protection. And you’re going to understand a few other very important things like how to own the work that others create for you. Other independent contractors, and even how to avoid getting into trouble when using protected material from other businesses within your marketing.


There’s so many important things that we discuss on today’s show. And so I’m so glad that you’re here and you’re not missing it. So let’s talk about our guest. If you did not hear her amazing introduction last week, let me give you an introduction. Francesca Whitesburg is an award winning intellectual property law attorney specializing in trademarks brands and copyrights. She advises Tom businesses,


brands, entrepreneurs, professionals, talent, startups, and individuals. Francesca has experienced working at various in-house global luxury brands. She has also worked in the world’s largest law firm today. She’s a partner at an IP law firm, Loza and Loza and creates content on her Instagram. And she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram. She’s absolutely amazing.


So I’m very glad that you’re here, power packed episode. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of this show notes and the resources that we’re discussing can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on podcast. And this is episode number two 22. Also, we have one more important bonus. So Mark your calendar. If you are on clubhouse,


we invite you to join Francesca and me in our regular Wednesday room on Wednesday, April the 14th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Now, what does that mean? That means you get to jump into a clubhouse room and you get to ask Francesca your copyright questions, your direct business questions. That’s what we love clubhouse. And we actually use clubhouses our community extension to this podcast now.


So we have a regular room. We host every single Wednesday at noon. You are invited to join us there this week on April, the 14th, Francesca is going to be there taking your copywriting questions as an extension from this podcast episode. So it’s an amazing opportunity of course, completely free and a chance for you to really get your business legal questions answered.


If you’d like to join this room, here are the steps to do that. Visit me on Instagram at April beach life. And you can click on the link in my bio and simply follow me on clubhouse and follow our club on clubhouse. When you do that, you’re going to have notifications and with clubs house, when your notifications are on, that gives you access to these very special rooms.


So very simply follow me on clubhouse. And I can be found at, at April beach on clubhouse, where you can go to my Instagram at April beach life on Instagram. And both of those opportunities will give you a chance to follow me there or giving you notifications in access to Francesca. So that’s our special bonus with today’s episode. And I know that’s going to be so powerful for so many of you who really do have important business questions you need answered right now.


So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episodes. Welcome back to another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am joined again by my very favorite person this year, Francesca Whitesburg. She is here diving in with everything legal for you to protect your content, your intellectual property. And this is actually part two of a two part podcast episode we did last week.


We dove all into trademarking. So if you miss last week, pause this, go back to episode two 21 and start with that one and then come back here and join us. If you listened to last week, let’s get ready to go. We have so much to cover today and you are going to gain so much knowledge by this wonderful woman who is here just strictly to pour into you to protect your intellectual property.


So welcome back to the show. Francesca, thank you so much for me. Thank you for having me April. I’m excited to talk about copyrights. Yeah. Okay. So actually let’s go ahead and dive right in. So really what is copywriting for anybody who is absolutely brand new at this? They know they need to know what it is, but they don’t even have a baseline starting point.


Yeah, of course. So copyright is a form of intellectual property protection that the text creative works that can be your videos, your photos, your courses, the layout of their website, your podcasts. It covers anything that you’ve created. That’s fixed in a tangible media. So it can’t be like an idea in your head gotta be written down, actually like manifested in the real,


but once it’s out there, it’s protected automatically under copyright law. Okay. So let’s take a step back. I know we talked about it extensively in last week’s episode, but can you just give a general description to our listeners in what is intellectual property, Of course, intellectual property, which is IP, which we refer to as refers to creations of the mind.


They’re your invention. Anything that’s proprietary that you can upload your photos, your grants, your slogans, trade secrets. These are all things that you have created that either you or your business owns. I like to say you have your IP toolbox. And then in that tool box, there’s different tools you can use like patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets.


So good. Okay. So incredibly foundational, but yet so many businesses aren’t aware of that. All right. So my next question for you, and I know our listeners, especially those who listened to last week are automatically asking this question right now. What is the difference between a copyright protection and trademarking? Yes. Trademarks really protect source identifiers. So Sweetlife when you read that name,


you know, that that’s April beaches programs, she’s offering her consulting services April. You’ve seen, created a full brand around that. And also it’s your company name too, but to consumers, we know that that’s April. So that word tells people that if you get consulting from this person, it’s April, who’s behind it. The same thing. When you see Coca-Cola or burger King,


you go to a McDonald’s in Spain, you’re in a know that it’s the same person who’s behind that. That’s the function of a trademark. Now a copyright is a very different tool, but they can overlap. So copyright extends to any creative expressions. So if you have a really unique logo that went along with sweet life, I it’s like a little like circle with some interesting artwork in there that you use.


And when I, anyone one sees that I think April, but also it’s very detailed. It’s original. That can also be protected by copyright. So if you are working with IP counsel, a good lawyer is going to advise you holistically and really tell you all the tools that you can use to protect your intellectual property from different angles. Okay. Fascinating.


And so for our listeners, do they need to register their works for copyright protection? So copyrights are similar to trademarks in that they are granted automatically. As soon as you create something you posted online, put it, like we said, in the fixed medium, then you have protection. However, if someone is using your work in an unauthorized manner, that your permission,


right. To actually get them to stop in the United States, you need a registration certificate. So I like to say, you know, you could send them a letter, you can send them a DM telling them to take it down. Cause it’s, you know, using your copyrighted material. But with that, without a registration, it’s like waving an empty gun.


You’re really not gonna have any teeth behind it. Got it. Okay. And so let’s kind of just pause here because I want to get back into content around courses and really big written works that many of our listeners do, but let’s just kind of take a jog for a second and talk about a couple of areas where people tend to run into trouble and they have absolutely no idea when they’re using other people’s works.


So the first one is photography and using somebody else’s photography within your business, what do people need to know in relation to copyright? Anytime you use photos taken from the internet or anyone else’s photos, technically you need permission and you can get yourself into a lot of trouble if you use it even on just a random post or you’re using it for something more visible,


even mental, a lot of trouble. And so the way that you get around it is you either use photos and images that you’ve taken yourself, or you can purchase the rights to some of these images. That’s where you can use database as like Getty images to buy a license, to use those infants for certain purposes. Yeah. And I think that the,


you know, so many new businesses and actually even established businesses that are just trying to scale online, just kind of starting to get their Instagram out there. They don’t realize that grabbing another photo out there, you know, there is a license, but behind that and that you have to be within your legal rights to use that. And so just wanted to make sure that we were discussing that here on the show as well,


because I, I know that people have ran into problems with that in the past. Another kind of side question for you here, going back to our listeners original piece of work, their course that they’re creating the content that they’re delivering within their coaching programs or their mastermind, or they’re teaching their intellectual property, their methods, their signature programs, right. With some of our listeners hire other people to create parts of their work for them.


What do they need to know and be careful about when they’re doing that? Yeah, that’s a great point April. So when you hire someone to create whether it’s a logo with design web design, anytime you’re paying someone to build software or whatever it is, if they’re not an employee within the scope of employment, paying them a salary or hourly, or the bank benefits,


then technically they are the owner of the intellectual property. So you need a written assignment called an assignment for what an assignment means is a transfer of rights. So that person needs to sign a document that says all the intellectual property created around this program. And it’s more detailed than that, but I give all that copyright and all that property is transferred to two and you’re comfortable.


It’s very critical, especially if you’re going to pay a lot of money, really need to get this in writing because otherwise they own what you thought you paid for and they can continue to use themselves, or they can give it away to other people and competitors. Yeah. Imagine that nightmare hiring somebody to, you know, create something for you and your course or your program.


And then it’s not actually yours. So important. So thank you so much for discussing that. And that assignment is, is really incredibly important. And, you know, I know that the majority of our listeners, their teams that they have are actually independent contractors. So this is completely something that is critical for them to be aware of is this assignment within their independent contractor agreements.


And that’s why working with an expert like you to make sure it is, it says exactly what they used to say is so incredibly. Okay. So let’s go back to this process of protecting copyright. So another side question for you when our listeners are using the notation on the bottom of their slides or their PDFs or delivering, or their written work, and they have the little copyright protection and then they have the gear on there and then their ownership,


why is that important? And what is the correct way? If there is a correct way just to enter into that sort of, Yeah, you, you hit the nail on the head, you see the copyright symbol, which will say do it in an emoji you’re on like on your phone. And then you put either your name or your company’s name.


Whoever’s really claiming rights to that ID. And then the year, and what that does April is that’s putting third parties on notice it’s again, reminding people, Hey, this is my copyright. This is protectable information. If you use it without my authorization, it’s illegal. So don’t do it. We’ll do it. The only way that you can really get them to stop is if you file that registration.


Got it. Okay. And so I know that we get that question all the time. Clearly if I don’t answer it because I’m not an attorney and I know that so many of our users are wondering that, you know, they see that when can I use it? How do I use it? Especially those that have multiple years listed on that listing and in exactly how to go about doing that.


And so does the year usually reflect the original work or does the year cover when it is currently being protected in that listing on it? It could vary, right? So like sometimes it’s like people open up a book, you’ll see the original publication copyright notice, but then they’ll be the most current version. But for our purposes, I think it’s fine to do it.


Like, let’s say you had to create your website in 2020, you can have 20, 20 is the date, but then if you make changes to it, which you’re going to just keep updating, updating the year. Okay. So many, I already know that these are questions people listening or are having, okay. So now let’s go back to kind of the center of what we’re talking about here today for our listeners,


how do they start the process of protecting their intellectual property, their content course program outlines, where do they begin with this process? Yeah. I’d love the way you put it April, because you implicitly said, how do they protect what they already have? Everyone already has IP. It’s just a matter of understanding, which are your most important assets and how you go about protecting them.


So I actually offer an Ikea audit where I will look at websites, social media pages, courses, some of my clients give me access to their, you know, their subscription-based or whatever, log in to see their forces. I do a very holistic review. And then we will go get on the phone and do a 30 minute call to discuss what their most important assets are or we could talk about,


okay, here’s the name of your operating vendor? Have you thought about three markets that’s going to filing for that copyrights? Do you have your independent contractor agreement language? We’ll kind of go through and just do like a checklist, like as if I literally am doing an audit on your seat and make sure you have everything there. I recommend that as a starting point,


and there’s also an IP audit and I can action plan, which is like the deluxe version of that, which is going to really do a deep dive. And then we come up with eight phase one plan, which is your first three to six months on what filings to do. And then also the next like six to 12 plus months for the next round of filings,


because everyone has so much great content. That’s great IP. It gets a little overwhelming to think, Oh, I have to do everything. The reality is that you don’t, you stage it out. And if you have a plan strategy about it, it’s really not going to be that expensive. It’ll be way more expensive than the end. If you don’t do this.


And if you try to do deal with cease and desist letters or sending this letters as they arise. Yeah. Nightmare. So once somebody submits their work for copyright protection, each time they update it, do they need to resubmit that Great question. So anytime you modify a work that it becomes a new popular, it’s a new work. So I would say as long as the modification is substantially similar to the original work,


then you can rely on that. But if it’s very different and using that a lot publicly, it’s probably worth at least running it by an IP lawyer to come up with a strategy. Okay. So much great information, Francesca, thank you so much for being our guest again here on the show and joining us in clubhouse rooms where we talk about this.


There’s so many places where people can connect with you. You know, we highly recommend that people take up the opportunity to go through an IP audit. And what I love about why I have you on this show is that you understand the way service-based online entrepreneurs work and you understand what they’re creating and you understand courses and masterminds and signature programs, and you understand all these things.


And so it’s hard, frankly, to find an expert like you, that fully understands the assets that our listeners are creating. So thank you so much for being on the show and being an amazing resource and the best place for people to connect with you is through your Instagram. Is that correct? Yes. I have a link in my bio. It’s my counselee.


I’m happy to get on a 15 minute call just to hear about your business And to discuss if you want to do an IP audit or if you just want to Connect. Yeah. Great. All of you guys should take her up on that. It’s a very, I know it’s crazy. It’s totally free. So you can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and we will make sure that a link to that of course is in our show notes as well.


So it’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And what is your clubhouse handle the trademark at the trademark attorney on clubhouse as well? Of course. Thank you so much for being here again and being our guest expert this week. I know that everybody really needed to hear a way, the things we’ve been talking about the last two weeks on the show. So certainly appreciate your time.


Absolutely. Thanks April. Thank you so much for sticking around with us. What an amazing episode Francesca is a super genius and perfectly in line with what our listeners and our clients need. If you would like to work with Francesca, if you would like to just take her up on her opportunity to connect with her for a free IP audit, please visit Francesca directly by visiting at the trademark attorney on Instagram.


So for handle is the trademark attorney on Instagram and the trademark attorney on clubhouse. She can be found at both of those places. Thank you so much for tuning into the show. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about, and all these links can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. You guys have an awesome day. Bye bye for now.

Episode 221: How To Protect Your Business by Trademarking – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Bonus – Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 7 & 9, 12:00 Eastern time. Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

As you name your business, programs, courses or creative work, you want people to recognize them as your brand, and it’s important that you know how to protect your creations so that others can’t use it. 


In this episode, we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company name, tag lines and creative work including your courses, branded programs and more. In this jam-packed powerful episode, we’re diving into; Who needs trademark protection? How much it costs? How to check if the name you want to use is available? How to block someone from using your trademark and more. 
This is part 1 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 2 we dive into Copyright protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you need to file for trademark protection
  2. Understand the difference between word and design marks
  3. Know where to start in your protection process

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome to episode two. You one here, we’re diving into an important topic today, and that’s how to protect your business through the process of trademarking. And there are so many questions around trademarking.


We get this all the time in our business programs, especially in my year signature offer business program, where people are really coming in and branding their method, branding their industry, leading signature programs. And so there are always questions around how do I protect the name of what I’m creating? And so I invited today’s guests to come in, pour into you.


And this is what we can expect by spending time together here today. First of all, this episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business growth and development. Now, this really aligns with one of the tools here that we give away completely free with the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And that is a self-assessment where you can find out exactly what stage of business you are in.


And you can take this self-assessment by simply visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. So when we’re talking about who this particular podcast episode is for this episode happens to be for any of you wherever you fall in the phase of business development. Because if you haven’t protected your intellectual property yet through trademarking, then this is an important topic to pay attention to. So as you go through the process of naming your business and your programs and your courses and your creative work,


you want people to recognize that they’re yours, they’re your brand. It’s an important part of building your business, a recognizable brand. And so in this episode, we’re talking to trademark attorney Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company, name, your tagline, to your creative work, including your courses, your branded programs,


and more, this is a jam packed episode. And she talks about powerful things in here that every single business owner needs to know. And then we’re diving into who needs a trademark protection. How much does it cost? How to check if the name that you want is available, how to block someone who could be using your trademark or infringing upon your trademark.


And there’s so many different things we’re going to dive into. So I’m going to go ahead and get right over to the episode. However, I want to make sure that you know, that this is part one of two episodes where we have Francesca on the show. And so next week we’re talking all about copyright protection and today is all about trademark. At the end of this episode,


you will know if you need to file for trademark protection, you will understand the difference between a wordmark and a design Mark, and you’ll know where to start in your protection process. Everything we’re talking about here can be found@theshownotesbyvisitingusatsweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 221. And one last thing we are going to be live with has got on clubhouse the Wednesday that this show drops.


So that will be Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. So if you were not following me yet on clubhouse at April beach, and you want to connect with Francesca in, take your questions from this episode to her, live in clubhouse, then make sure that you join us. And you can simply do that by following me at April beach on clubhouse and turn on the little bell for the notifications.


And you will get notified when we’re going live, which will give you access to Francesca. It will give you access to this room. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by Francesca Wittenberg, who has been instrumental in helping our business, make sure that everything that we have is our ducks in a row.


If you will say, and she’s here joining me on the podcast today, talking about quite a few very important legal foundations that you really need to have a no for your business. And so Francesco, welcome to the show. Thank you so much for being here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself in UHIN, who you serve and really how you got to where you are right now,


professionally. Thank you so much, April. I’m super excited to be here. My name is Francesca Pittsburgh. I go by the trademark attorney on Instagram and I’m an IP lawyer. We’re going to talk about what IP is, but basically I help creators businesses, anyone who has created something using their intellectual creativity and especially people who are trying to monetize that I help,


whether it’s trademarks, copyrights, helping businesses get started to monetize and protect what they created is what I do. And I service really a variety of industries. I have fashion experience, story brands, online businesses in particular, and navigating how to protect content and all of the assets that you’ve created online. That’s really been my niche for the past year or two.


And, you know, I got started by going to law school. I had no idea what intellectual property was like most people. And I thought it was so amazing how, what you create are your real assets. These are real things that you can command. You can protect, you can sell. So I really fell in love with that. And also helping businesses get off the ground.


I feel like I’m able to kind of give back really help people launch. And so I got into it. I worked at a small IP boutique. I also had experience working in the legal departments at Prada and Tory Burch and the international jewelry brand from there. I really got the bug and I just wanted to learn everything in anything about intellectual property, in whatever industry.


And then I worked at the world’s biggest law firm called Dentons. I worked in Manhattan and Brock center for a little bit over three years, and then I made a big change. Yeah. I mean a big change becoming a partner at an IP boutique firm, meaning we only do intellectual property from start to finish like firms located in LA, but I’m based in New York and New Jersey.


I can service clients everywhere. And since September, I’ve just been really hitting the ground, running, helping a lot of online businesses, connecting on clubhouse, meeting people like you April. So I’m super excited to share my knowledge with everyone today. I’m so excited that you’re here and you know what? You do this super hyper niche area of serving online businesses.


I mean, you help our listeners protect their ideas and protect their services and their programs and their courses and their actual digital products, which is absolutely right on. And I know that there are so many people in this business space that are creating content that are creating different assets and what we call IP that have no idea, even the first step on, on how to protect that.


So let’s go ahead and start there. What actually is IP? What is intellectual property? Sure. So intellectual property refers to creations of the mind. They are inventions designs, creative works, brands, slogans, or anything that you’ve created kind of creatively. And so the law is divided up into certain categories and I like to call it, you know,


you have your IP toolbox. So there’s certain tools that you can use to protect whatever it is that you created or your business there’s patents, which protects inventions. Sometimes it protects certain ways of doing things processes, and it also sometimes protects designs. If it meets certain thresholds, then there’s trade secrets, which kind of works in tandem with aunts. If you’re not eligible for a patent may be able to protect confidential and secret information that is proprietary to your business so long as you’ve kept it private and you haven’t publicly disclosed it.


Then what we’re really going to focus on today is trademarks and copyrights. Trademarks are your brands. They are the symbols. And the names that you have created to tell that this is my business. I April beach am the owner of your signature offer. I upgraded this course, and that is my protectable content. The function of trademarks are to point to the source.


And then there’s copyright. Copyright is the creative regime. It really extends to creative, works such as content photos, certain texts, if it’s eligible videos, website layout. So, you know, just by saying that alone, there are so many different tools that you can use to protect an online business. And so we can talk about that. Wow.


Okay. So in, this is exactly why, I mean, just in that definition that you just gave, you talked about four really important areas that our listeners can and should be possibly if they qualify, protecting what they have created and what they plan to create. And I really want to dive specifically into trademarks today and we’re going to have Francesca back on the show.


Everybody don’t worry, and we’re going to be diving into other things as well. But I think this is really the most important place to start out. You know, just in my, your signature offer master class, we were having this kind of behind the scenes conversation about this. And even those students of mine that have been in business for over a decade are just almost like in this panic mode when this conversation came up because they realized they might not have done things correctly.


And so that’s why I’m really excited to dive into trademarking today. So first of all, I understand that there are two types of different trademarks that you can protect. Is it like a design Mark and a word Mark? Can you explain what those two different types of, of marks are to our, Yeah, I get asked all the time I have a brand name and I have a logo,


which one should I file for what’s protectable? And the short answer is that the word market itself, if you file an application with the government, just for the word in standard characters, that will automatically protect the name and any siloization. So if you go to re rebrand and change your logo, if you have a wordmark registration, that’ll extend any specializations colors,


whatever format. So we do searches for the word. And if that’s available, I usually say, go for the word Mark, but you’re right, that sometimes clients will have, let’s say it’s not just a script, right? Let’s say that they came up with a unique character or some sort of interesting artwork that they have in a circle next to the word,


a good example of this is target, right? You know, target has the word target and red, and then you’ll see the bullseye above that bullseye they use as a trademark. So they could file for the word target without a stylization and be protected. They can also file just for the bullseye, which is the design element, and that will be protected or they can file for a lockup version,


which includes the word and the design. So there are a variety of ways and it really is case by case specific, but more importantly, it’s about budget. And I always tell clients, start with your corny for your forklifts and services, because it can get very expensive. And also as a point of strategy, it may not be worth filing for every single variation of the bark.


Just start with your core name and your core goods or services. Okay. And who needs to file trademark protection? Let’s kind of really cover some basics like who needs it. You know, what’s funny is that if you were asking this question 10, 15 years ago, the answer different, it used to be fortune 500 companies had trademark lawyers and they were the ones Coca-Cola Pepsi,


big brands were the ones registering trademarks that has completely shifted with online businesses. And I think we need to take a step back and explain an important concept April that you and I have discussed. So in the United States, trademark rights are based on use. So I’m sure all of you have one point or another. Someone has said to you, Oh, you don’t need a trademark right now.


You don’t need to file the trademark. You have rights just based on use, just continue to use the problem with that is, like I said, 15, 20, 30 years ago, that wasn’t really an issue because you were a store in one particular market in one city, right. Or your restaurant, or you were consulting in one area in person.


So it didn’t matter. Really. If someone was using the same name, you’re in New Jersey and someone’s using it in LA necessarily. So the law as it States is you have Commonwealth rights. Your rights are limited to that, to where you’re actually using who you’re servicing with online businesses that has caused to be blunt chaos, because how do you prove where your servicing clients by being on Instagram online,


you know, having websites that technically target and market, not only all 50 States, but even outside the us. So the way that you get around those issues is by filing the application with the government, having a registration gives you a presumption of rights in all 50 States. So that way, if someone is using your name, all you have to do is send them that piece of paper.


That’s triplicate of registration and show them that you’re the owner and they should in theory. Got it. So many questions that, and I’m obviously, you know, I’m bringing questions from clients that I, that I know have been asking as well. So let’s kind of start back at the beginning. If there’s somebody who’s listening to this and they have program that they’ve named,


let’s say it’s best business, one, two, three, or whatever that they have been using for a long period of time. What are their first steps as of now versus somebody who hasn’t even, who’s coming up with a new name, let’s start with the established people that are saying, Hey, listen, my company name isn’t registered my program, or my course name or my mastermind name,


isn’t registered. What should those people that are already have an existing piece of work that they own do at this point in time? Yeah. And I think it comes back again to budgeting and understanding that a little bit of money can go a long way if you’re strategic about it. What I like to do differently, I think than most lawyers is clients come to me and say,


Oh, for test that I want to file for this. I say, let’s take a step back. We can definitely file. But did you protect your brand name, your core name? I have clients that come and say, Oh, this slogan, I want to protect it’s brand new and it’s new. No one’s using it. So what I do is I do an IP audit for a lot of clients,


but when they come to me, I say, let’s just take a step back. Let’s look at all of your websites, all of your courses, and let’s figure out what’s the most important instead of you deciding or someone telling you which trademark to file let’s think strategically and say, what are your most core names, your core content and connection with your core services?


Because it gets very expensive very quickly. So I would tell people who are using, and they haven’t had anything registered to really, you know, touch base. I’m happy to do this, to discuss and do the IP audit, but you can also do it yourself and just think like, what are the core names that I’m using and for what particular services,


and then get those on file. Yes. Maybe you came up with like a super cool name slogan that you’re using, but are you really going to be using that in six months to a year versus I would say the name that you’re operating under, that may be the first starting point. So I would say, you know, either check in with an IP attorney who can do that with you,


for you, or think about it and then get those on file. Okay. And let’s make sure that you guys don’t have to wait until the end of this. If you want to connect with Francesca for that IP audit, find her on Instagram at the trademark attorney. And she actually has a link in her bio on Instagram. You can just schedule a call with her.


So we’re making it really easy for you. It’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And plus she has amazing videos and things on there that you guys will love. And you can schedule a call to set up that IP on it. Okay. So for those people that are listening and they’re new in business, and they’re just trying to, they’re thinking, wow,


I really want to name my company. This, what are their first steps? You know, let’s actually talk about how to search the U S PTO. What is that process and is, Yeah. So the first thing is to come up with a name, if you’re just getting started, I would say, come up with names that try to not be so descriptive because as business owners and content creators,


we want to express to our viewers what exactly it is that we’re offering. But unfortunately that falls on the lower end of protection. On the trademark scale, the really strong trademarks are the ones that are either made up terms like Google or terms that have nothing to do with the product that you’re selling, like Apple computers. Then there’s this sweet spot that a lot of marketing people like,


like April, you do this really well. You will find names that kind of hint at what you’re doing, but don’t literally describe like your signature offer. So those are the sweet spot they’re called suggestive marks. But anything like weaker than that is, is a little bit more descriptive in there. You can still get them as trademarks. They’re just a lot harder to protect and enforce,


meaning other people may be able to use them. And then when you go to create a brand that you’re about to invest a lot of money in, you know, you need to think about these things. So the more made up the less related to the actual things that you offer the stronger and the better. Okay. So for those people that are like,


okay, this is what I want to do. How do they go search and see if somebody already has that trademark registered? Yeah. So let’s say you came up with an awesome name. The first thing to do is go check on the U S T o.com. That is the government website. The government has a database of registered and pending trademarks. You can plug in the Mark,


but unfortunately it’s not very user-friendly. For example, if you put in the Mark, it really may only give you either the exact spelling, maybe with a space, but it really is very limited. It’s going to look for the exact Mark. So if you did work with the trademark where like, for example, I have special software where I plug in the Mark,


I plug in the goods and services and then with its AI software, it’ll pull up marks that are medically similar. Maybe they have a translation and a foreign language, and all of those can be potential issues that you’re not going to find yourself. However, for your due diligence. The first thing to do is for you to check on usp.gov, because maybe there is a dead hit,


and you’ll find that there, the next thing to do, though, it’s not enough just to look on you as PTO, because there could be people who are using the Mark that may not have a registration. As I mentioned before, trademark rights are based on use. So it’s really important to see who’s using and who can raise a potential objection. You check Google,


check, Instagram, check all those platforms, and then if it looks good, that’s when you go and you work with a trademark attorney. Okay. Okay, great. So you do your due diligence, you know, go, you know, was us pto.gov, not.com. It’s not geo OB do that check and then Google the heck out of it as well.


And I, I think that that is so important. I know that, you know, some people go, Oh, they’ll just search it and they’ll be like, Oh great, it’s available because it’s not popping up. And that is absolutely nowhere near enough. And then I can speak for experience. You guys, who are listening that I have had Francesca put our trademark names in her AI system and crazy things that there’s no way I ever could have found pop up.


So it is definitely an important investment to make. If, if you were in the process of growing your company and you have IP that you want to protect. And so I think that’s really an important thing. So any other last words today, when we’re talking about trademarking moving forward or any other things that our listeners need to know that are often missed,


maybe common questions, basically, what am I not asking that I should be asking you? Yeah. Number one, we’re in the middle of a, of a pandemic and a financial downturn. So you’re going to have a lot of people who may not want, or may not have the deans to file trademarks. So I will tell you there’s things you can do to try and protect your name,


even without a registration start using those TM symbols. And you may not know what that is. So a TM symbol, now that I’ve mentioned that you’re going to see them everywhere. It means that people are claiming rights to a name or design as a trademark. They’re saying I’ve created this. And when people look at it, it points to me means that’s my website,


it’s my services, whatever it is. So you came up with a slogan, or if you have your brand name that isn’t yet registered, put the little TM in the upper right hand corner. And what that does is that puts third parties on notice. So if you have another person to get the Google search went on and found your website, they’re going to see immediately,


Oh, this person is claiming trademark rights. I better back off. So that’s an extra element that you can do. It’s not as strong as a registration clearly because your rights are only limited to where you’re using until you get it on file. But at least it’s something. And I would say, think about budgeting for that registration, for some of your four names.


It may sound expensive. And I think it’s worth quoting. You know, you’re going to get people who are gonna do this cheaper, and you’re going to find people who are gonna do it more expensive, but my firm has a fixed fee package with a trademark search and the government and the filing. And it’s 1250, you know, that’s a deal,


it’s a deal. And I’m just thinking like the cost to respond, who would demand letter or to send a demand letter is that amount. So to get that on file, to kind of not have to worry, think about maybe budgeting that as part of your business process. Yeah. And I will say about, Oh gosh, it’s been about 12 years.


We filed a registration for a program that we were licensing to healthcare. And this was 12 years ago. And I think I paid, you know, well over 2,500 for somebody to just file that registration for me. So this is 12 years later, grand Jessica’s team. This is a deal. You guys it’s like the deal of a lifetime and it protects you.


And it really covers you. So we love that. So all of you who are listening, if you’re in this place, whether you’re new and you are just coming up with names of really, frankly, especially for those of you guys who have content, you have IP, you have things that you haven’t protected yet. You haven’t done your due diligence.


I don’t want you to lose those Francesca. Doesn’t want you to lose those. And so if you have questions about this, I highly recommend that you hit Francesca up for an IP audit. Again, she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and she will, of course be back here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast, again as well. And we’re going to be diving into copywriting next time,


which I know so many of our listeners have questions about protecting, like what actually is that? And so I’m excited to talk about that the next time that you are on the show. Thank you so much for being here and for all of your wisdom and pouring into our listeners. Thank you April. Thanks everyone.<inaudible> Wow. What an amazing episode.


Thank you so much for hanging out with us today. Again, join us live on clubhouse. You can follow me at April beach, turn on the little bell for notifications and you’ll get exclusive access to this room where Francesca will be here this week on Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Taking your questions based on what we talked about on today’s show.


And don’t forget to connect with Francesca directly for her IP audit, which is a very important thing. It’s totally free. I don’t know anybody who shouldn’t take this opportunity up. She is absolutely a gifted expert at what she does. You can visit Francesca at the trademark attorney and she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and on clubhouse. And on Instagram,


you can just very simply click the link and schedule a direct free complimentary consultation to get your intellectual property audit started. All right, again, this is episode one of a two part episode. Next week, episode number 222. We’re coming back with Francesca again, talking all about how to protect your creative works through copyright protection. All right, you guys have an awesome day.


It’s so great to chat with you and thanks again for tuning into this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast.

Episode 220: Writing Emails So Good They Lick The Screen – with April Beach and Kate Doster

Kate Doster SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Bonus: Join us for a LIVE Clubhouse chat and get your email marketing questions answered. 
Simply follow our club on Clubhouse and turn on notifications. 
Live room will be 4/2 12:00 ET 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Small businesses who either currently use or want to utilize email marketing.


Email marketing is an important way to connect with your warm audience, hold an ongoing conversation and increase sales. However, most businesses flop when it comes to writing emails that truly compel their audience. In this show, Copywriting expert, Kate Doster breaks down the process of writing great emails in an ethical way by wooing the hearts of your ideal clients open. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what makes a good email and a great one
  2. How to use “calls to actions” correctly in your email
  3. The process of writing amazing emails that convert

Resources Mentioned:

Kate Doster’s Podcast | Inbox Besties

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. So two 20 here on the suite live entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m April beach, your host, and I’m super glad to be chatting with you. And yet another week here on the show,


this is episode number 220, and I can’t wait to dive into today’s topic. This is one of those ones where behind the scenes here, I was taking so many notes based on what our guest expert was teaching today. So there’s just gold inside this episode, as we hope to deliver to you within every single episode. First of all, before we get started,


if you’re new to listening to the show, thank you so much for tuning in here. We also go live and talk about the podcast and take your questions every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time on clubhouse. So if you are not yet following me on clubhouse, please do so. I would love to connect with you. We can really dive in and roll up our sleeves regarding your business questions.


Every single Wednesday, faithfully at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And my handle is at April beach on clubhouse. So I would love to see you there also, if you’re new to listening, or maybe it’s been a while since you’ve tapped into this important powerful resource, we have our lifestyle entrepreneur roadmap quiz, and this is based on my start to scale up system.


It’s a totally free tool. If you’re a listener to this show, you can go and take a very short quiz, just six simple questions. And it’s going to tell you what phase of business you’re in and based on the phase of business you’re in, we give you an exact checklist of what you should be focusing on and what you should be working on to scale your business,


or just really get your business to that next level. And you can take that quiz any time you can go back and take it again and again, by visiting sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, or you can simply text the word quiz to the number (805) 254-0880. And we’ll send you a link to that. So those are our free tools. In addition to all the gold,


you’re going to hear her on the show that I wanted to make sure that you have upfront so that we can keep your business implementing as we move forward through the entrepreneur podcast here. So I appreciate you listening to this show. This is what we’re talking about today. So let’s set the stage. This show is great for those of you guys who are in the first three stages of my start to scale up system.


So that’s based on the quiz. So if you’re in phase one, two or three, this is a great episode for you to listen to. If you’re in phase four or five of my start Taylor scale system, you’ve nailed this strategy. And so I recommend going to find a different podcast to listen to that applies to your stage of business. I want to make sure that I value your time so much.


And the strategies we’re talking about on today’s show are for those people in the first one, two or three stages of the start to scale up system. So what we’re talking about here is how to literally write emails that are so good. They lick the screen. You’re going to be mind blown about what you hear on today’s show. This is for small businesses who you either currently use email marketing.


You’re not sure if you’re doing it right, or you’ve never used email marketing before, and you want to learn how to leverage email marketing in your business. Email marketing is an important way for you to connect with your warm audience. It’s also important for you to hold an ongoing conversation and to increase your sales. However, most businesses flop when it comes to writing emails,


it’s truly because it’s, it’s actually a skill it’s not as easy as you would think that it would be in your emails really need to compel your audience. So in the show we have Kate Doster, who’s a copywriting expert. She’s going to break down the process of writing great emails in an ethical way, by wooing the hearts of your ideal clients and their wallets open.


At the end of this episode, this is what you can expect. You’re going to know what is the difference between a good email and a great email. You’re going to know how to use calls to action correctly in your emails. And you’re going to know the process of writing emails that convert. So let me tell you who is here today. She is absolutely amazing.


Kate Doster is the host of the inbox besties podcast. Creator of love your list. 2.0 email marketing mega course, it is dangerously obsessed with helping ethical entrepreneurs carve out their slice of the interwebs by winning the hearts and wallets open of their small, but mighty audiences. Thanks to funny bell marketing and easy yes, many offers. So that’s important as we went through our bio,


her bio here, that what Kate’s bio says is she helps you. Even if you have a teeny tiny small list, increase the engagement in the sales based on your list. That was one of the key things. When I was reading her bio and why I asked her to come on this show because listen, you guys, you only need a hundred true fans to build a great business.


That’s what it starts with these huge audiences. I mean, this can be an illusion. So those of you that don’t have huge lists with 10, 20,000 people on it. This podcast is great. And it’s also for those people that do have huge email lists. And perhaps you are failing at connecting well with your list. Kate believes you don’t need to bleed the alphabet or be a dirty rotten spam face to write emails,


adult subscribers, and to taking action gobbling up your paid offers like candy or kale, if that’s what you prefer. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast. All of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com simply click on the podcast button. And this is episode number 220<inaudible> All right, you guys, I am joined by Kate Doster and she is going to give you the complete strategy that you probably didn’t even know.


You’re actually missing to write amazing emails because what she teaches, what she talks about, isn’t just the fundamentals. It isn’t just like how to section out the content in your email. She literally teaches you how to write emails for so good people lick the screen. And that is her quote. I stole that from her to name this podcast. So giving credit where credit is due,


Kate, welcome to the show. We are so excited to have you here tell everybody about your superpower in your company. Sure. So I’m Kate Doster of Kate doster.com and hosted the inbox besties podcast. And my super power is really being able to help people. Not only feel like they can do anything, but actually give them the tools to get them there.


I think that there’s a lot of people that kind of hype you up and make you feel amazing. But then when they’re like, but how do I do X there’s like, go figure it out. But like, no, like we do the whole approach because our mission is to put money in the hands of good people so they can do good with it.


So our business is primarily a digital course business. I am extremely selective about the one-on-one clients that I take on, but primarily it’s courses digital products. We just we’ve got to help the good people out there. Right? And you teach people how to like create these insane bodies of copy that totally bring to life what it is that they do, their super power.


And there’s such a disconnect. I’m so excited to have you on this show. I need to give Angie true blood, our favorite person credit for connecting you with us. And when Angie was like, okay, this is an amazing guest for you. First of all, anybody Angie sends to me, I know it was just an amazing guest, but then I saw your,


your topics. And I’m like, Oh my gosh, yes. Emails that not only like convert, but emails that give an experience. So let’s dive right in and talk about one of the things you said behind the scenes, as I was getting ready here and taking my notes for what we’re going to talk about today is you have kind of like this four things that you go through.


And the first one you talk about is something that really other copywriting teachers don’t, and that is all about mindset. Talk to me about mindset and how that plays a role in copywriting. Sure. So like I said, good people do good. Most good people have very bad associations with things like selling. They don’t want to be annoying. They don’t want to be lumped in with a spammer faces.


Are there really bro Hames as we call him the world, he’s our arch rivals. He has a whole voice as he does. So because of that, they tend to really freeze that when it comes to emails, you know, Oh, I don’t want to be annoying or I don’t want to be spammy. Oh, you know, like I haven’t emailed them in three months.


So now they are literally psyching themselves out because either they feel bad, they feel guilty. Everyone’s been telling them everywhere. Like you need to have an MLS. Why don’t you have an email list, email, your email list, you dummy. So they get all up in their heads and they do no thing because everyone’s been on the receiving end of really bad emails.


But here’s the thing. The sheer fact that you are having this thought of, I don’t want to annoy people. I don’t want to be a spammer means that it is physically impossible for you to be there. And it is physically impossible for you to write one because the really broad themes as a world who are those farmers, they do not care. The fact that you care proves that you are going to send them high quality stuff.


So who guys think you already did it? And when I talk to people like 100%, it is always, Oh, I feel like, or I think it’s like, so it’s not truly the mechanics. It’s I need to get your finger to, to hit the sand on the good old convert kit, Right? Oh my gosh. Okay. Like we can just end the podcast right there.


Like, okay, you need to fix your mindset. You’re amazing. You’re not like a douche bag. You’re going to send grace. So I think that’s so cool. Okay. And then the next thing that you talked about is, you know, being on your list is a privilege. Let’s talk about that mindset all together. What do you mean by that?


Okay. It is a two side of the coin. One. When you realize that people are honestly lucky to get your enthusiasm, your encouragement, your knowledge, your expertise, they are lucky to be there. So all of a sudden that scarcity mindset of, you know, if I send a newsletter, a hundred people are going to unsubscribe. So no,


like I don’t have this mystical thousand number. Like who cares the people on the other end of the screen, do not know if they are one of, 100, one of five or one of 10 million. They have no idea when it is our mission to help you need to help regardless of that number. So when you’re like, Oh, bring it on my list as a privilege.


And somebody sends you a nasty email back, you laugh at them and then you kick them out. You’re like, no, like literally I send a lot of emails. I send a lot of what’s called sales emails. I got two last year. One was because I said home slice. And the other one I think had, but face in the subject line,


I literally went to go see what these people had signed up for. I’m like, how did you get here? I was mad at my landing pages, my gatekeepers, my content like allowed you in here. So when you go out with that mindset of being on my list is a privilege. Not only are you not going to care about the heaters because you’re like,


whatever, Sally, there’s a way more people for me to help. I hope you go find your own teacher is that, then you’re going to have a plan for it. So it’s a two side of the coin, like on next again, you’re allowed to have that human experience. If somebody sends you a me an email back, but then you get to laugh at them and be like,


man, I wish I had so much time that I could sit there and complain and whine and have my day ruined by somebody else. But like I’m too busy out there making a difference. So I can’t, Well, you just like blew my mind. That is so profound because I mean, what are the things we’ve talked about in the, the last four years is having somebody on your list as a privilege and,


and treat them with care and all these things. But what you’re saying is just so true to every single thing that I know, I feel as an entrepreneur bit like basically, like, I feel like you have just given people permission to be like, you are valuable. What you say is worthy. Your content is amazing. If somebody doesn’t resonate with it,


see you later celly, like you said. And then the next thing I said was really important, which we can even get into in this episode. Was that the gatekeepers is that making sure that your opt-ins, we’re totally not going to go there. Cause we could do a whole show on this, but making sure your opt-ins disqualify people at the same time as they qualify people,


the right people, that connection that you meant, I’d love that you mentioned that too. Okay. So when we’re writing email, the next tip kind of mindset strategy that you have is, is really treat people like people. I know I’m literally doing the shocked face. You guys can hear it. So again, because good people doing good things, right?


No one wants to be a spammer face. You tend to forget the, like there’s another person on the other side of this screen. So like how many times have you gone to like check your email, but then like the dog knocks over the plants and I need to clean it up. And then by the time you get back to your email, it’s like the next day or two days later.


So like, if you have this amazing product, you have this amazing coaching program and you only email people about a once you’re being the jerk. Ironically, it is the other way around because what if they just didn’t check their email that day? Now they are never going to know same thing with, and I know that this goes beyond the scope of this particular lesson,


but same thing with launching, like when you’re actually doing a launch. Yeah. If all of your emails are, you’ve got one day left, you got five minutes left and all of those are awful. Awful. You do need to send things about time limits because people do need to know. So I have nothing against timers, but you need to understand what actually goes through a person’s brain.


People are not logical. And when my students kind of grasp that around their heads, they’re like, Oh, Piedmont logical. If there were, you would have all exercised today, there would be no smoking industry. There’d be no drinking industry. There would be no drugs because people, if they were logical, why would you start smoking? When you know,


it’s only going to hurt you. Cause they’re not logical. So realize that they’re not logical trying to be like what? There’s eight modules. And my competitor only has four. You dummy is never going to work because they’re not logical. You have to actually compel them. You’ve got to cut through the crap. You need to know how a human brain works.


And that’s why my students get like astronomical results. And they’re like, Oh my trip wire, it’s converting at like 5%. Can I go higher? I’m like you to realize that normies only get it at one to two. Right? And they’re like, Oh, so then we’re just like, you know, going against ourselves. But when you understand how a human brain works,


treating people like people it’ll all work, which is why, if you haven’t emailed your list in a while and your first emails is big sob story about why you haven’t emailed them in forever. Everyone is going to be like, I don’t like you. Cause like they don’t care. But if you go in with some type of value and then you’re like,


Oh yeah. And if you’re wondering, how would I get your email address? Again, treat people like people because you signed up for this. Oh, all right. Help me out with something. You tell me what I’m thinking. We’re good to go. I’m not going to hit spam. I might just unsubscribe quietly. So treat people like people realize how their brains work.


So many good things that you said there. I love that. Okay. So let’s actually talk about, and I was actually laughing. I had to put myself on mute cause I started coughing. You’re totally. You totally have me. Correct. You know, leverage really love it. So talking about like I know, right? Like talk about, let’s go into actually the mechanics of writing an amazing email.


So walk us through the mechanics of actually doing it after everybody deals with all the mindset stuff, which I’m so grateful that that’s how you open up this training. I mean, you just have to, again, just like set up. So you can’t do one in seventh grade and have a six pack forever. I mean, I wish present witness tasks could have just been like take that postpartum weight.


Right? So again, it can be a daily thing, you know, it can be a daily thing. So don’t just think like, Oh, but I thought I worked on this. It’s always going to have a thing. So when it comes to writing emails so good, they can like the screen one getting out of your own head is important too.


Like we had just talked about treating people like people is important. Why do you check your email? Cause you don’t want to have to write that sales page you’re supposed to, because you don’t want to have that awkward conversation with your VA because you’ll know that you’re supposed to be pitching podcasts, but you don’t want to get around to it. So they’re like,


Oh, let me just check my email real quick. Right? So you’re doing it as a distraction. You’re doing it as an escape, which is why when people are like, Oh, but I send these big, long, huge emails. Yes. I know being in spam is probably a bad thing. Promotions it’s all right. People check that tab.


The thing you do not want to be in is the all read this leader email. Okay. So you cannot info slap people in your emails because people are not going in with the mindset of an email of I’m going to do hardcore learning. That’s what a blog post is for this sort of podcast is for that’s what a YouTube video is for. That’s what a course lesson is for an email is that short hit of escape.


Okay. So you need to realize that. So when you’re doing your email, yeah, you can have on that super long, as long as it’s entertaining. No one’s going to care. And as long as you’re not trying to tell them a hundred different ways to get clients, they’ll be fine. So when it comes down to actually writing an email like that makes them want to like this screen one,


you need to realize what your actual goal is. So your goal might be for them to reply back. Your goal might be for them to read an email, your goal might just be to build comradery. Then you’re going to want to make sure you have an action. I say, every email needs a call to action. It doesn’t have to go someplace else,


but it can be a reply back. I think that reply back is one of the strongest calls to action. Because next time it is more likely that your email is going to be in the folder that you want to be in. Or again, it can be a follow me on Instagram. It can be on this, but you’ve got to give people a reason to go over there.


You just can’t send an email being like, Hey, are we connected over on clubhouse? No, you need to entice them. What is in it for them? Treat people like people. So in order to make your emails more entertaining, I get constantly, but Kate, I don’t have a big personality like you, but I’ve averaged, but I’m boring.


I guarantee you, there are something about you that you can start putting into your emails, whether it is the name of your cat, your favorite song. You can, one of my favorite things. If I can’t figure out, what I want to email about is I’ll go to a website called holiday insights. You can just Google any of them and I’ll see like what day is it?


Like a national nacho day? Okay. So like say if I was a food blogger, then I could just send Nasha recipes because it’s natural nacho day. If I’m somebody else I could talk about like know like it’s natural natural day. And you know, since that’s pretty cheesy, I want to tell you about the three things that are going to make your website cheesy.


Like you can just rip off of these things. And now all of a sudden, not only are you just using just stats to like 200% of blondes, make more money, I’m making that up. But again, look for stats about your industry stats, about what day it’s going on and then just make some correlations. And the more that you get used to doing that,


the better that it’s going to be. Again, there was a reason why you created a blog post or why you’re going Facebook live, which got me thinking about, which is why in the slide. I don’t just necessarily give them the link, give them the link, but then put a little bullet points because you got to remember, people are reading on their phones.


So when it comes to structuring things, you want to make sure, honestly, if it’s longer than two sentences, I say, give it a paragraph. It used to be three. But I feel like if it’s a wordy three, the probably should be a paragraph. So you’ll see that a lot. Cause people will skim, you know, make sure you use things like bold texts,


but have, you know, little bullet points underneath to talk about like, what’s so great on there. Like, Oh, okay, it’s going to tell you the one thing never to send in your email. She’s going to tell you, if you haven’t emailed your list in forever, these are the two words you used to not having your email, like think of what can I do to make these a little bit more interesting.


And then it’s like, Oh, because every email guys spoiler before, really every email is a sales email because you are selling the fact that you get them, that you understand them, that you’re going to be there for them, that you’re consistent, that you want to interact with them and that you are not ability to borrow him. So whether you’re asking for cash or not,


every email is a sales email. So now you don’t have to get over sending any cause they all are. Oh, I love that. I love that. Oh my gosh. It’s so good. You’re just gold. Okay. I mean, that’s just, you just nailed it. That is so good. And I have learned so much here. Okay.


So I’m going to throw out a couple of common questions that we receive as a company. And since you’re the email queen, let’s see how you answer these. So, and you already answered the first one was does every email need a call to action? And so you’ve already answered that. So we’ll just skip through that. And I love how you answered that in some form.


Oh, you know, let me ask this question in case anybody’s thinking, could the call to action, be giving them steps, like now go outside and look up at the sun and take two deep breaths. Like could the call to action be something that doesn’t have to do with replying or interacting back to you at all? Or is it just having some sort of a call to action?


So definitely give them action steps. Like quick wins are huge, which is why I love how you said go outside and take two deep breaths. And you didn’t like tell them like this whole giant routine to do, but there’s nothing to say at the end of it that you can’t be like, and when you go outside snap a pic and tag me on your Instagram stories.


So that way it’s really organic. And so that way you can share them on for doing something. So if you’re going to give them a little task, give them a place where they can brag about themselves, treat people like people, they like feeling good About themselves, post About it. And some people will, some people post in the Facebook group tag me on your eyes,


your story post on my business page. So I can say how awesome you are. Let’s go outside together. You know what I mean? So that way you can incorporate them more in the world and then treat people like people they’re going to associate that good feeling with you and that’s what you want. Cause then So cool. Okay. And so along those lines,


we’ll just say, if you’re listening to this podcast and you absolutely love everything that Kate’s saying, make sure that you take a screenshot, I’ve listened. He does put it on your IgG story and tag Kate and tag, thus we live company, or you can just tag April beach life and okay. So cool. Now next question. Newsletters versus emails,


you know, the newsletter was kinda dead honestly like seven years ago, but now we actually have clients that like their newsletter is so amazing and they only send it out like once a month and it’s like long and juicy and almost like a calendar. What is your take on the strategy and the difference between newsletters in regular emails? How have you seen those playing out?


If you will only send a newsletter and by newsletter, I want to make sure that we have the same definition. Are you saying something where it’s like multiple calls to action, multiple sections? Is that what you’re defining as a newsletter? Yeah. These are huge newsletters that some of our clients, which are larger companies already, that you know, are in the process of scaling that they send out these newsletters,


people like go crazy at one of them could be sign up here for this. And one of them could be, did you remember to join this? There are multiple calls to action. In these things. We call that more of a magazine style email. If that is the only one that you will do, so you will actually send it, then send it.


So I had an interior designer who was a student and when she tried to do of that one call to action type of a thing, she really mindset got into her head a lot. And so what we did is we went ahead and we turned it into like her Wednesday newsletter. We gave it an actual name and I told her just like magazines have repeating sections.


You need to have some repeating sections, but realize that if you are trying to sell, say an ebook and you’re still having all three of those sections, then the likelihood of them buying is going to be a lot lower to people. Like people, you give them a lot of stuff to do. They will do everything else or they’ll do nothing. Like there’s actually a scientific study.


The jam study. If you get 12 choices versus 24 at 24, you’ll just walk by because you’re just like, that’s too much for my brain. Right? So when I told her, that’s not to say she can’t have flash sales or launches because I feel like, Oh my goodness, she’s emailing on Monday. It’s gotta be important. So then she can just do the one that has the one call to action.


So make sure that you are strategic realize with those newsletters, that the likelihood of them going to spam or promotions is going to be higher. The more outward links to different places that you have, the more likely it is to trigger something. So you can link to your Instagram five times if that’s your call to action, because it’s going to the same spot,


your Instagram. But if you’ve got an Instagram one, that’s going to a deal that you have one that’s going to a blog post one, that’s this one that’s that it can go in there. But again, if you are more likely to send us a magazine style newsletter than send nothing and send it, just realize that your sales aren’t going to be as high because you can’t focus them on one particular action.


So like I would never send a new style in the middle of a launch that would make no sense because people would get derailed. So that’s just the difference if what you want to go with. So if you’ll never do anything, just one of those, but again, try to keep it consistent because then people that are interested in certain parts, they’ll always go right down to that section.


Okay, cool. And now I have a couple other questions that are coming up that I know people are probably thinking. So I’m trying to be in the mind of our listeners right now, a question about the frequency of sending. Is it better to send more frequently, you know, less frequently? Does it depend on the relationship between the business and the audience?


Is there like a regular consistent, like rhythm that you recommend with email sending? Okay. For most people, if you only send once a month, this is nothing. That’s your client. And again, if they’re a larger corporation, they could probably get away with it once a month. Especially if you’re a smaller, more personal brand is not going to necessarily be enough because people are going to forget about you.


You’re not top of mind, they’re their goal. Fishes. Everybody has a goldfish treat. People like people. You’re going to hear that a lot. What I would say for people, especially if you are a personal brand, especially service owner, you’re selling your own courses, aim for once a week. That’s four emails a month. Y’all handle writing four emails a month and what’s gonna end up happening is you’re going to get so good.


You can batch them, meaning, sit down and write them all. Sometimes w a lot of my students really love to do is they will come up with a topic for all four and then they’ll write like two at a time. Right? So again, it’s done, they’ll load them into the convert kit. They’re active campaigns. Doesn’t matter whatever tool you’re using.


And then they know that they’re settled and then people get so hyped about this. Or they do some casual selling, which we teach in the course. And then I’m like, okay, I’m going to add another day. But I would never say like, email this. Now, if you’re doing a launch or you are doing a flash sale, you’re going to want to send more than one email.


Because again, people might not check. They might forget treat people like people they procrastinate so that you’re going to have a little bit more. But as long as honestly, what you have to say is interesting and it’s tackling different doubts or your habits that people have, you can keep sending Austin repeat yourself. Okay. And then the one last question I had is when somebody does have a launch,


you know, it’s normal that people unsubscribed from the list and people get so afraid of that. They’re like, Oh, like the whole mindset thing, which we already knocked out of the ballpark, that’s gone. Now, we already dealt with that. What the question here is, is there like an average expectation for a percentage of unsubscribes that you have seen during launches or is it totally vary based on different brands and businesses?


How frequently they launch? How big obviously, how great the relationship already is with building the relationship? Is there like a average percentage that people can quote unquote expect in unsubscribes around a launch period or no, I don’t know if it’s necessarily during a launch period. The only stock that I could find was in general and it’s actually does hold true. If you guys go look at your analytics is usually when you send any type of email,


you can expect about a 1% unsubscribe rate, which is pretty interesting. So again, if your number is a hundred, then your percentages are going to be like very skewed. So keep that in mind. We need to have some logical, even though I don’t do logic, but like, so keep that in mind, right? When it comes to a launch,


the biggest reason that people are unsubscribing is because you started talking to them about something they didn’t care about, or you never gave them an out. So like the launches that I do, even though, like, I teach email marketing. If you didn’t sign up for a launch, trigger a webinar, a challenge, all of that. I’m not going to send you all my launch emails because you’re not going to want them.


I will send you two. And one of them is just a recent it’s like, Hey, I know you didn’t sign up for this webinar, but I know that you were struggling with ABC and D this is open until Wednesday. If you want to come, come, if not, that’s cool. And then in my launch emails that I have, and I always tell my students to do this too.


I always have that link bottom of the email, sometimes top of the email, Hey, if you know that love your list is not for you. This round, then click here and we’ll chat after the launch is over. Or Hey know that you have a great relationship with your list and you’re making more than $10,000 a month with it. Click here.


I won’t tell you any more about my course, because you don’t need us right now. Just give people an out, treat people like people. But again, if you are setting that one hour to go 30 minutes to go five minutes to go, and you’re making everything about you, then I guess if you could take anything away from this, especially when it comes to launching,


you need to be more excited for them than yourself, because nobody, I mean, we do care that like you have expertise. So I’m not saying any of those fake it till you make. And I hate that line. What I’m saying is I am so disproportionately passionate about seeing Sally earn money from our food blog. When everyone else in our whole fricken family thought that she was nuts.


Like, I am like hardcore rather than like, love your list. And I make all of this money. And like, yes, obviously in each of them, a copywriter, not some rando that hit like big with a pin, obviously that’s important, but it’s not like, Hey guys, my course is open. Never it is. If you are struggling with this and I get very,


very specific, we call them moments. We don’t have time to talk about them. Now y’all are going to have to tell me to find out that’s right. Then I got this and it is going to help. And here’s how it’s going to help because I am so excited. Literally you can see my face to see my people succeed. You have no idea.


And when you come at anything that you create that way, and I don’t care if it’s a meal planning guide, I don’t care if you help cleaning products, I do not care. We are more excited for what they’re going to be able to avoid and achieve. It’s like, I know, yeah, I’ve got this thing they’re going to buy. This is why my students and I get a logical Results and people like that’s bananas.


Like no that’s treating people like people. You are so good. I’ve appreciated you sharing and totally pouring out your crazy good expertise into our audience. This is amazing. Okay. So you have, of course an amazing free thing that people can have. Like if they want to connect with you further, or if they just want like these amazing results, you have two years worth of emails that you are giving to our listeners.


Tell them what that is. That’s amazing. Sure. So what it is is two years worth of email idea prompts. So if you’re ever sitting there looking at your screen, you’re like, I’ve got no idea what to email about. Or even if you’re like, I don’t know how to make this next thing sort of interesting. We do have it dated.


Now, keep in mind if you’re listening to this and it’s like July, it’s like, Oh, well, half the month is wrong. Spoiler alert. January is going to come back. So as April, so it’s may, so you can just restart it over. Like there’s no problem. And some people will actually they’ll follow it verbatim. Like,


Oh, may it sets in this, this, this, and this. And we’ll do it. Some people mix them up. Some people go and just peer in other months. And that is 100% there because now, you know what it is. If anything is time-based because a couple of months we’ll have something like, it’s not Neil national hug your cat day,


but if there’s something that’s going to be time-based to be, well, we make sure that at least once a month, you’re really highlighting some type of paid offer, whether it is an affiliate deal, whether it is her own stuff, any of that sort of stuff is in there as well. So you can hand it on over to Kate Doster dot for slash Sweet life,


either with a hyphen or without I got you both. And then you guys will be able to get that. And you can always listen to my podcast, wherever you’re listening to this. It is in a box of besties and my Instagram, which I’m working on. Let’s say it that way. I spent so much time cultivating my email list, social media.


I kind of forgot about, so it is Kate underscore Doster. So y’all can see the name and I’m sure we’ll have it in the show notes. Yeah, we will. And yeah. Yeah. Instagram followers does not equal amazing experts. Definitely. There’s not an equivalent therapist. I want people to be able to connect with you more. And also you are newly on clubhouse.


So I’m like talking to you behind the scenes. You guys, if you’re in our Sweetlife club on clubhouse, I’m talking to Kate about getting on the calendar. And so we can do a clubhouse room for you guys where you can connect with her directly and ask her your questions, which is so cool. So we’ll put all of that information in the show notes as well.


Kate, thank you so much. It was so awesome to get to know you and to hear everything that you deliver today. We really appreciate your time. I think you’ll ever remember guys being on your list is privilege. So treat it like one<inaudible> Thanks so much for hanging out with us at the end, you are the a game players, right?


You were the winners, the ones that stay and apply all the strategies. As a matter of fact, I was speaking in a clubhouse room recently that if people actually just listened to this podcast for the last four years, they probably would save up to a hundred thousand dollars in startup and scale business coaching that they might have spent on other coaches. We really are here to dedicate true and proven business strategies that you can take to the bank.


So thank you so much for listening to this show do join us in our clubhouse room. We would love to meet with you and clubhouse. We’ll be speaking live at 12 o’clock Eastern with Kate Doster herself. If you’re listening to this live, that will be Wednesday, April 2nd, at 12 o’clock Eastern. And you can find that room by visiting sweet life business.club.


I’ll say that again. Sweet life business.club. And all you have to do. If you are a clubhouse member is you can quickly simply click the button and join our club and you’ll get a notification of this room. All right, you guys have an awesome day. I’ll talk to you next week. Bye-bye

Episode 219: How to Build A Personal Brand That Lasts A Lifetime – with April Beach and Nicole Herring

Nicole Herring SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Need faster business growth? Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs in the first stages of business growth, who feel like you’re struggling to make a decision on your personal brand and how to represent yourself to the world.


As an entrepreneur, expert or professional leader, one of your strongest assets is your personal brand. Your brand is the outward representation of who you are and what you bring to the world. But oftentimes, leaders struggle with imposter syndrome, or get confused about how they want to show up. You might be afraid that you can’t take things back once you show them to the world or you’re fearful of judgment or regret.
In this, our guest Nicole Herring, NLP Practitioner, breaks down her process to help you make strategic. personal brand decisions.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand personal vs company branding
  2. Have a set of questions you can ask yourself to make personal brand decisions

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate, Hey there, and welcome to episode number 219 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. And today we are diving in and Having a conversation all about how to build a personal brand that lasts a lifetime with our guest in the house today,


Nicole Herring, this is a great show and we’re going to go ahead and dive right in. But before we do, I want to make sure you have utilized the tools we have for you here to grow and design and scale your business here at this sweet life company. And through this week, I have entrepreneur podcast, all of which can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com


on there very specifically, I want to point to our start to scale up system. If you haven’t yet taken the self-assessment to find out what stage of business you are in, it is absolute gold. There are some short questions for you to answer. And then based on the stage of business, you’re in, we give you a whole entire list in a checklist,


actually with support in steps to get your business to the next level. So no more confusion overwhelm or shiny object syndrome. There’s a very short assessment will get you there. And you can take that assessment simply by visiting Sweetlife code.com forward slash quiz. Okay, let’s go and head and dive into today’s episode with our guests. This is what we’re talking about.


This show is great for any of you who are in the first stages of your business, launch and development, and even scaling your company. So based on where you are in that, self-assessment, this is great for those of you in stages one through three, and you feel like you might be struggling to make a decision on your personal brand and how to represent yourself to the world.


Because as an entrepreneur expert or professional leader, one of the strongest assets that you have is your personal brand, right? And your brand is an outward representation of who you are and what you bring to the world. But oftentimes commonly leaders struggle with imposter syndrome. They get confused about what they want to show up, who they want to show up as who they want to show up for.


In actually I talk with a lot of entrepreneurs who are kind of afraid just to even put their personal brand out there to the world, because they know once they do that, you know, you can’t really take it back. And so they feel like they are just stuck in this place where they can’t move forward. You’re worried maybe somebody is going to judge you and you don’t want to have any regrets,


but as a leader, as an expert, even if you have a company brand, it’s important that your personal brand shows up to the world, because people are going to connect with you as a person so much more than they’re going to connect with a brand or any sort of accompany brand first. That’s why everybody loves seeing behind the scenes on your Instagram or talking to you directly in a clubhouse room,


who you are and who you show up as are incredibly important things. And so that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. Today’s expert is Nicole Herring. She’s an NLP practitioner that breaks down her process to help you make strategic, personal brand decisions. And here’s a little bit of Nicole story and she shares it more when we dive into this, because I think it’s important for you to connect with it.


Basically she’s done everything. She’s been a designer and an entrepreneur, and she struggled with the fact of really stepping into who she is called to be as far as being also a mom. And she has gone through the process to create an amazing structure that she’s going to guide you through today that helped herself go through how to make personal brand decisions for her business.


Another little backstory here is Nicole is also, I first met her. She traveled with us to Florida in fall of 2020 for our Sweetlife company planning retreat. I had never met this woman before. She was absolutely a gem, even though she lives like 12 miles from me, isn’t that crazy. We had to fly to Florida from Colorado to meet each other for the first time.


But one of the things that really stood out to me, she photographed our entire week there and it was amazing, but how she did that was she really worked with my team. She photographed my team as well to really extract who they were as people so that it represented in the outward view of the photos that they would use professionally. It was absolute genius.


And that’s why I have invited her on today’s show. You’re going to absolutely love this woman, just like I do. So at the end of this episode, you’re going to understand personal versus company branding. And we’re really diving into the personal branding side. And Nicole has given you a set of questions that you can go through and ask yourself to make the smartest,


most confident, personal brand decisions for yourself. All of the show notes and everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number two 19. All right, let’s go ahead and dive in.<inaudible> All right. You guys, I am joined by my very, very good friend, Nicole Herring. And let me give you a little bit of a background story.


Before we dive into today’s business trainings. Nicole lives 15 minutes from me, but we had never met. We were introduced by Cathy Hawn. Who’s an amazing woman and she connected us because I was looking for a photographer. Now here’s a little bit of the background story too. I have never been into like personal photo shoots because I didn’t believe anybody could actually capture me and who I authentically am.


I was, my experience was I was always like forced to be somebody that I’m not anyway, long story short. We were planning our business retreat at a beautiful beach in Tampa, Florida on the beach in Tampa, Florida. And I really wanted to bring a photographer and I met Nicole and I realized he was the first person that I had ever found that could truly capture the authentic behind the scenes of what we were doing as a company and to get amazing photography of really what it’s like to be part of the Sweetlife company and who I am as a person.


So I had the pleasure of spending a week with Nicole on the beach in Tampa and walked away with the most incredible photos, just capturing everything we did as a company. But then also, I mean, this woman took the time to know me. She even had me like laying down in that sand And I was like, yes, you want me to lay down with my hair and the seashells in the ocean.


I would love that. You know, so she, I really took the time to know who I was as a person. And I am just so blessed to have her in my life. Now, the thing that we’re talking about today is one of Nicole’s incredible giftings, and that is helping entrepreneurs actually create this personal brand that lives a legacy that is true to who they are as people.


And so there’s a big process of doing that. It’s not just showing up to take pictures. There’s so much more than Nicole identified in that. And that’s why I’m so pleased to introduce you guys to her today. Because after you hear about her process, it’s going to really put you in the right direction of creating your personal brand in a way that’s true to you.


So Nicole, welcome to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. So glad that you’re here. Thank you. I’m thrilled to be here. I just want to say thank you. And yeah, I love, I love how we had to travel to another state, literally on the other side of the country to finally meet each other, we have had a couple of calls and COVID kind of came up and our original plans derailed,


but we came together anyway. So I love how worldwide our brands are. And yet, like we still had to meet, we still had to get on a plane to actually connect. And it just, it’s just the way I love to do business. Like, I’ll meet you by the beach. I think I wrote that at the bottom of the email.


I’m like, just tell me when, and I’ll meet you by the ocean. Right. And we did too. Like she met me by the beach. It was awesome. Tell everybody, yeah. Tell everybody about, you know, kind of your evolution To your now area of incredible expertise. Thank you. Yeah. You know, it’s interesting. Cause it’s like at one point when I decided I wanted to leave the version of motherhood,


that was the stay at home, the homemaker version of motherhood. What else is out there for me? I really did not know what that looked like. And I just thought, how can I get paid to be creative? I didn’t know what that meant. There was a whole entrepreneurial part of the journey that I was just like, so outside my realm of possibility at that point,


I didn’t know what I didn’t know. And so I did, I went on a journey for a couple of years of just allowing myself to say, Hey, I would love to get paid as a personal stylist. As an interior designer, I rebuilt and refinished furniture. I paint on canvases, like all kinds of things and then fell into finding that I had a knack for writing.


And then writing led me to copywriting and copywriting led me to branding and branding led me to photography. And then it was like this whole full circle cycle where it was kind of like, Oh, branding, photography, personal style, interior design, all of that is all so well encompassed and all the facets in one nice and neat package. And I was like,


Oh, so like, I didn’t even know branding was a thing. So I really pursued that path. And I really loved it. I worked with some great women, helping them build their brand, writing content, helping them create launch strategy. And then they would do nothing, right? Like they would pay me thousands of dollars to develop these concepts.


And then they would get stuck in their own brain. And in their own minds of feeling like they were an imposter or they couldn’t figure out how to then become visible in their business, even though they thought they were hiring me to solve the problem of, Oh, as soon as I have the copy, I’m good to go. As soon as I have the images,


I’ll be good to go. As soon as I have a launch strategy and I have the bird’s eye view, I know how to take steps. I just need somebody else to show me, help me see the way. And so I thought, Oh great. I’ll be happy to be, get paid to be creative and do all of this. But then I found that they were just not taking action in the business.


And I thought to myself, okay, what is it that is keeping some people from taking action and some people did not. And then it kind of, I stumbled down the path of NLP, which is neuro-linguistic programming. It’s a modality for coaching through the mental and emotional blocks that keep you from creating success in your life. And I found some of my own blocks and healed and transformed theirs.


And then I was like, sign me up. How do I become a practitioner? So I put a pause in offering creative services so that I could bring this to my clients so I could support them mentally and emotionally while they are creating a brand so that they’re not living in this tension of who they are portraying themselves on social media versus thinking there’s somebody different in real life.


And so as a really a matter of eliminating that tension and helping them see that they are the best and the worst of both of that and owning the good, the bad and the ugly so that they could actually move forward with their business. So there’s the long and the shit of it. Yeah. I mean, that’s so it’s so important. I think there are so many people listening that have spent so much money on valuable deliverables like you were creating,


right. And they thought that that’s what they’re missing and they still don’t take action on it. And so I love that you were so intentional and you’re like, wait a minute, you’ve paid me thousands of dollars and you’re still not using this stuff. What’s the problem here. So I love your journey. It’s very much who you are now that I know you kind of being like,


okay, now where let’s take another step back, where are we getting stuck? Where’s the bottleneck. So today on the show, we’re talking about how to build a personal brand that lasts a lifetime. And we’re really talking about a really how to encompass that. And there’s so many different things that we’re going to dive here. And, you know, if you’re listening and you have bought many things before and maybe felt like you were stuck and you haven’t taken action,


this was a really important episode for you to keep tuning into cause Nicole’s can actually take you through her framework in order to actually that outlines a thought process for you. So you can make intentional decisions, which is so cool. But before we get into that, let’s kind of set a baseline for somebody who’s listening that might not know. So first of all,


let’s define the difference between a company brand and a personal brand and kind of dive into that just real quick. If anybody, I wouldn’t say, if anybody I know who so many people ask me these questions, like, should I brand myself or should I brand my business? And what’s really the difference. So can you just basically explain that for anybody who might be wondering?


Sure. So when you’re branding a business, you’re branding a solution that appeals to a particular ideal client. And so everything that you’re doing within a brand of a business is okay, who’s our ideal client. Who’s willing to pay for the solution that we’re offering. What is their price point? Is it for a business to business solution? Is it a business to consumer solution,


right? It’s all about the consumer and the problem that they’re attempting to solve when you’re in a personal brand, you’re still very focused on the client, but the client also wants to feel like they’re resonating with the person who’s delivering the solution, who’s delivering the transformation. And so the personal brand aspect is just, it’s a bit about who you are as a human and you’re injecting those qualities into a brand.


And the very simplest way is to take like, like you and I were talking about previously is just taking, you know, a few basic adjectives about who you are as a person and injecting that into the visuals of your brand. And so that when people meet you in person, they feel like they already know and connect with who you are, because your feed or your,


you know, the way that you speak, the energy that you have comes through. And so there’s, there’s no disconnect there in the personal brand, from the visuals we’re seeing online and the person that they meet in person, right. Because you don’t, your brand is speaking for you long before you’ve actually connected. One-on-one Right. And something you said to me before we started recording,


that was just super important is that you said the personal brand also tells the idea of clients. It tells them a story of what’s possible. So they are actually able to see what they personally, it’s very hard to find, see yourself personally, in a company brand, right. But when you’re looking at a person and you’re seeing their life and what they’re doing and how they’re going about doing that,


where they go and what they’re wearing and who they’re hanging out with and all those things, all of that is representative of what is possible for them when they work with your services. And I thought that was so important for people to understand. And that really speaks a lot to, if anybody has that question, should I brand myself, or should I brand my company?


There are very important. We could have a whole podcast on that, but just, just to take away, there are some very important to note that doing both is very important. Moving forward to a certain extent, obviously, based on, on your company and based on honestly, based on your company, exit strategy, if you want to have your company acquired and things like that in the future.


Okay. So let’s go ahead and dive into why it’s important now. So some of the reasons why it’s important to create an authentic personal brand that is really, really true to who you are in a couple of things I want you to define for us, if you could, please are number one, what is imposter syndrome? Because that word is used quite often and people might necessarily not necessarily know the actual definition.


And then what’s in between that in self-doubt. Yeah. Thanks for asking. And I did bring up the definition just because I want to make sure that I am saying it correctly, because the way that I, well, I’ll just go with it. So imposter syndrome, according on a quick Google search, it says that it’s loosely defined as doubting your abilities and feeling like a fraud.


And it’s disproportionately affects high-achieving people who find it difficult to accept their accomplishments. And so basically when I say, what, how self-doubt and imposter syndrome differ is it, imposter syndrome says that you even look at the evidence and then you diminish it. You actually say, Oh, I’ve created 40 grands in my business, you know, in X amount of time.


But that was just a fluke. Like I got really lucky. These three things happen, X, Y, and Z. I didn’t really make that happen. It was a fluke. It was by accident, all that. So you diminish what you’ve accomplished and also hold it against yourself. And so the self doubt is what keeps you from taking action in the future.


So then you’re now diminishing. What’s possible for you, even though you have evidence that supports that you can create Results because you’ve done it. You’ve now diminished it and created self doubt that then prohibits you and even self sabotages. You moving forward with the expertise, the zone of genius that you have, the skillset that you’ve nurtured, or your natural talents that you have,


right? Like all of that, you then now discount and say, it’s not, I mean, I can’t really charge. I don’t really know what I’m doing. Like I just, you know, whatever. So now you’re discounting what you can do in the future. And the imposter syndrome kind of is how you reflect on what you’ve accomplished and say,


I’m just surprised if, if only people I, the fluke made 40 grand or whatever it is. Right. Right. Okay. So just a random question for somebody who’s listening. I mean, most of our listeners are in this growth and scale phase of their business, but for those that are listening, that are brand new business and they haven’t done anything yet,


like they’re starting from scratch and they’re looking around and being like, like, how do I do this? There’s all these other people that are better than me that have been doing this longer than me, that LA LA LA like all these things that they’re saying to themselves in their mind, we’re going to go through this framework here, which I’m so excited for you to share your framework.


But is there something that you would say to them specifically? Oh, for sure. So all the time, and I mean, this is, I’m not making this statement up. People say it all the time, but it’s like, you cannot compare your beginning to somebody else’s chapter 47 or whatever it is. And so you have to allow yourself to,


to be bad, to be a starter, to be fresh, to be new. And also, if you really want to look at what you’ve accomplished in your life, you can lean back and evaluate self-evaluate every job you ever had, even as a babysitter when you were 14, right. Like take it way back and go old school and look at every job you ever had and look at the skills and qualities and things that you have honed and created from each individual job.


I mean, I know I worked at a bagel shop when I was a child. Like not<inaudible>. Yeah. You definitely got through that. I mean, 15, we were children. Right. We thought, we thought we were so big, but yeah. So, you know, 15, I worked at a bagel shop and then I worked at a law firm when I was 16 years old,


just, you know, working in the back. And so every single job that I’ve had, I’ve been able to look and see like, okay, well, if I could do that job at age 16, then what did I get from that, that qualifies me for what I’m doing now. And you can actually go back and just prove to yourself and self-evaluate and say,


actually, I had no luck, I’ve done a lot, acquired a lot of skills. And so it’s the human condition to look at where we’re lacking, as opposed to where we’re actually having the skillset and honoring what, what we do know. And so you have to literally train your brain to not look towards the negative and seek out the positive. Okay.


So, and then one of the, one of the ways that this works, even with one of my clients recently is that she was like, I was like, okay, tell me a time in which you felt really successful. And she was like, Oh, I don’t know. I’d have to really think about it. And I’m like, don’t think about it.


Just tell me a time in which you felt successful. She’s like, well, I don’t know if the is like successful enough. And I was like, see right there, right there as a, as a feeling of not being good enough. And the reason why is because if I said, tell me something that sad that happened, you could immediately go to a sad memory,


but you wouldn’t second guess, was that sad enough? Was that the status memory I’ve ever had? Probably not. Right. And so it’s a human condition to really look at the least important parts of the detail and make them the most significant things you have to retrain your brain. And so that’s a process that I actually teach my clients. That’s the reframing process that I’m going to teach you right now.


It’s a bit of, a lot of different things that I’ve learned. There are so many teachers out there who teach different parts of this. And for me, pulling it all together was not a feat in the sense where it was a hard accomplishment, but when I really saw the full picture, it just kind of blew my mind. And so until that process,


yeah. Do you want me to Right into it? Yeah. So let’s tell him, let’s kind of set everybody up for what’s about to come. So there are seven steps to it and you actually break out the word reframe into an acronym. So sh so you’re going to guide people through this process. And so at the end of this process, like when they’re done with this,


they’re going to have a clear thought process to make decisions on building their personal brand. That will last a lifetime. So that’s the outcome of what you’re about to teach here. Yes. Okay. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yes. Tell us your reframe process. Okay. So when you are reframing something, the first thing we want to do is really look at,


okay, what is the real and undeniable facts? What is the reality? That’s what they’ll let our RFC on spore. And so what we want to really do is break it down into three words or less of the problem that you’re trying to solve and take away all of the unnecessary words and all of the emotion and just simplify what you’re trying to create.


And so if what you’re trying to do is sit down and create, copy, offer a website. Or if you’re trying to write sales content in an email, or if you’re trying to start a nurture sequence in, in social media, you know, you just don’t make it into a big problem. You just like writing content. You know, what’s the most simple way for you to say this is the problem that we’re solving with the reality of the situation.


And so then the next letter is E which is experience. And so you really want to talk about like, what is the experience, the reference in which we want the person plays through the event of the thing. So in reference to writing social media content, when it’s the experience that I want my clients to have, when they’re reading through this, what is the experience I want to have when reading this same thing with writing content,


for an email sequence or in sales page, what is the experience we want people to have? And what’s the experience I want to have, right. Do I want to feel confident? Do I want to feel right? So that’s actually F I dumped right into the next step. It’s, it’s such a natural process that I can lead right into it.


And so the next letter of reframe is F. And so then you think about, okay, well, what are the feelings I want to accomplish in the writing this piece of content? I want to convert our readers into clients. How do I want to feel the number, one thing that people neglect to feel as confident, or like they know the answer to their client’s problem.


And so they sit down and they start to go into this worry, like, I don’t know what to write. I don’t know what my clients need to hear. Oh, what am I doing? Who am I anyway? Right. So they go into this emotional mind drama instead of sitting with confidence that they’re the expert and they know how to solve this problem.


If you can tap into that energy and get into that feeling and dictate the experience you want your clients to have. And so when will you, right? So like, let me Over to like building their personal brand. So once somebody listening would be, you know, you’re thinking when you’re writing the copywriting for your social media or in your website, you know,


really going through, you know, what is reality? What isn’t, you know, what is the experience you want people to have when they experience your personal brand? How do you want them to feel when they experience your personal brand? Yeah. This process is so good. Okay. So, and then R yeah, so the R is for the reaction.


And so a lot of times there’s an unintentional way that we react to our own thoughts and feelings. And so just how I was saying, when you’re sitting down and you’re thinking, okay, what is it, how do I want to be feeling when I’m writing the sales page or developing my brand and deciding who I am in the world and how I’m offering my services,


who am I, what are the feelings I want to have? This is the reaction of going in and thinking immediately the human design of just saying, I don’t know what I’m talking about and having that knee-jerk reaction of, of discrediting or diminishing all of the things that, you know, to be true and accurate about yourself and the a and the next one is just assuming radical responsibility and choosing an action instead.


And so instead of having the negative reaction and making decisions about your brand, what if you were just really intentional and you chose to like, trust yourself and believe in what you were saying and believe in who, who you were being and not live in that tension of that, your online personality or your online identity, and that brand is any different than who you are at home.


Sometimes there is some tension there, and that’s the mental and emotional awareness pieces that you have to kind of get the coaching on because the strategy is nothing. If you don’t have the mental and emotional pieces that support who you’re becoming and who you’re growing into in the online world. And so the M and reframe is for mindset awareness. And this is a different way of looking at it than most people usually do,


because a lot of times people think that mindset is, you know, like you’re either in growth mindset, you’re either moving towards something or you’re in limited mindset, or you’re in a lack mentality. And sometimes there’s something in the middle called neutral that nobody really gets to. And so I like to really attribute the mindset awareness to even like a storyline. So if you have a story,


there’s like a hero that’s out there, like saving the world. And they’re the ones that are in the growth zone and they’re making all the magic happen. Right. Then you have the other side, which is the victim mentality, the fixed mindset. And then sometimes there’s these innocent bystanders that are just part of the story, but it’s not really their drama,


but they’re just there, they’re a neutral person. And so sometimes I think that when it comes to in a mindset, when we’re looking, especially if you’re trying to build your brand, you coach people on this all the time, like find your competitive people, look at what they’ve got, what they don’t have assess their brand what’s missing. And then from there,


fill in the gaps with what’s natural and true to you, and really honor what you’re better at, but then get out of there and do not stay in the place where you are now living in comparison land and looking at their, at their content. And now going into the victim mentality that your brand is not as good as theirs, you know, all that kind of stuff.


You just need to get back to neutral by just removing that negative feedback from your own brain, by just knowing who they are, knowing what the competition is, and then not living in their world is the only way you’re going to create success. And so you have to just decide, am I going to grow into this? Can I go into neutral?


Or am I going to tumble down into victim world and, and be in a limited mindset? And now second, guess everything that I’ve made a decision on. And then the very last word is E which is the three E’s. Cause I could not pick one. There’s too many great words here, but listen, you have to experiment. Okay. So you just have to shift things and just be willing to experiment live in the curiosity whenever you’re testing your brand and you’re validating your offers,


you just have to say, what’s working and what’s not working and really take the failure of things landing or not landing away from who you are as a person, a failure. Is it about an event? A failure is not an adjective of me as a human, right? But it might be a rat. The failure of a specific idea that I had,


the idea was a failure. That doesn’t mean I’m a failure as a person. So you have to be able to experiment with curiosity, obviously, execution of all things, right? You give strategy to people all the time, how many people are taking strategy in and implementing, right? Like this is the disruption that you want to create in the market.


And, and in your industry of saying, okay, like, listen, information is not enough. If you’re not executing and implementing, you’re missing the Mark. And you, I know as a, as a brand and as a company are wanting to really change that. And then self-evaluation, I mean, here’s the thing, the reason why we fire people in business is never the reason why we hire them.


So if you can’t go back and look at why you’ve fired employees and you’re not learning anything from that experience, right? So the same for ourselves, like if we don’t self evaluate and look at where we, what worked, what didn’t work and allow ourselves to grow through all the circumstances, building a brand, launching an offer, all those things. If you’re not able to self-evaluate without being hypercritical of yourself,


right. It’s like critiquing and experience without being hypercritical of the self, that’s a learned skill set. So, and that’s one of the things that I found is that people were just, their inner critic was so harsh mine too. Right? Like I was like, everything that I did was not good enough. And I did not become an expert in overcoming imposter syndrome because I just learned from a book.


This is the crab. I don’t know if I can say cuss words on here, but I’m like, this is the S H I T that I went through to overcome my own self doubt and my own imposter syndrome and be like, actually do know a lot and had to go through this process. So this came from a year’s worth of wanting to get out of my own damn way to be honest.


Right. Right. And I love your framework. And I just want to highlight something you said, just kind of in recapping here, it was under the mindset piece. I love the neutral piece. And I think that you’re so right. I don’t hear that spoken to very often too, though, the gross or the fixed mindset, but what you said is you have to just decide to grow through this.


And I think that is so important because I mean, there’s nothing sexy or glittery about that. You just choose to go through the process of taking the action, which is your next step, you know, really in believing in what you do. And you just choose, take action to continue on, to force that wall down. And I think that that is so important that you said that.


So let’s go ahead and just kind of recap this reframe. So this is your reframe process. And what our listeners can expect is when you go through this and you take these concepts and you apply them to developing your personal brand, it gives you the thought process. So these are things that you think through as you are developing your visual in your written brand and the way your brand is represented to the world.


And so first you said the Aras reality, what is real and what isn’t the E is experience. And you elaborate on that. So beautiful. The F is diving into your feelings. The R is the reaction that a is assuming radical responsibility, love that the M is really the mindset piece. And then the ESA experiment execute. And self-evaluation, was it evaluate?


Yeah. Yeah, it was evaluate. It’s also good. It’s also good. And so this really is a thought process. I love that you have created a process of thinking to make sure that people are making strategic decisions about their personal brand personal branding. And I think that that’s why so many people get stuck, but when we’re branding a company, you know,


it’s totally different and we can pivot brand strategies and all those things. When you are personally branding yourself, especially putting it out on that forevermore timestamp on social media and what that looks like online, things that, you know, we cannot take back. Like once we put them out there, they are there. I think that’s also why people like there’s some confusion or fear or worry of doing it incorrectly,


but you’ve just done a beautiful job laying out this framework to have people really consider, you know, this is what I want to create. This is why I want to create it in a very intentional way. That is in fact, going to build a personal brand that lasts a lifetime. So thank you so much for taking the time for people. And how cool is it?


Like it’s always through our own journey that we build the most incredible solutions for other people. So the one thing I do want to say, I just want to say one thing is that a lot of times too, people put, they put this feeling of this as like, Oh, it’s, it’s forever, right? And it’s, it is building a lifetime brand doesn’t mean that you have to choose this one thing,


and then you’re going to stick to it for the rest of your life forever and ever. Amen. It just means that, you know, like you’re going to be true to yourself no matter what. So your brand is going to be aligned with you for the lifetime of your brand. It doesn’t mean that what you’re choosing today is the thing you have to stick to for the next 72 years.


It’s just how to be aligned for the lifetime of your brand. No matter how your alignment, the ebbs and flows of your own journey can always re attribute and rebranding is a thing. People do it all the time. You don’t have to say this needs to be set in stone. So don’t worry about that part. Just know that your brand will always be a reflection of you.


If you are really in tune with your and who you are as a human and confidence in that is what creates the most beautiful brand identities. Right? So well said, thank you so much for being on the show, Nicole, and we’ll put it all in the show notes here, how people can find you, but in the meantime, for those just listening,


tell everybody about your business and how they can find you on social media and online. Thank you. Yeah, I do personal concept coaching and I do brand identity coaching. And really it is the beautiful part that I love is to support the woman, to feel like she is the best of who she is in real life. And then making sure that that transfers into her brand.


And so that it feels this like it’s business, it’s personal and it’s, it’s a one beautifully reflective relationship. Instead of living in the tension of that, my website is really simple. Nicole herring.com and I C O L E H E R I N d.com. I have brand retreats coming up. Let’s all fingers crossed. The travel opens up internationally for right now,


we’re doing some, you know, a mainland of retreats. And of course I do coach my clients on a one-on-one basis. And I do have a group program that the sweet life company is helping me to get out into the world. So that’ll be exciting. And yeah, on social media, you can find me on Instagram as Nicole Herring, brilliant or no mine mastery coach.


Sorry. I recently changed the name of that. And then of course, I’m on clubhouse under Nicole Herring, just my name. So come find me, I’ll be getting on there and helping women to break through their self belief and limitations within themselves so that they can just get out there and make a difference. Yeah. And I will say, I actually get a lot of questions on who does our photography.


So this is the woman you guys, if you’re following me on Instagram, you want to know who’s taken all of our pictures. Nicole is the one and people have been asking me actually like, who is she? I want her to come to me and on my retreat. So those are, those are all good things. And what she’s teaching here in her coaching process sets you up to make sure the outcome,


the visual outcome is in line with who you are. So yes, the photography, the retreats are amazing, but I would highly recommend if you aren’t sure, and set and confident in who you are and who you were supposed to be to the world to really make sure that you’re honing in with Nicole and getting that set first. So everything you build and create is manifesting in the way that it is supposed to,


and it’s in line with you. So thank you so much for being on the show. I absolutely adore you. Thank you for who you are to us and the things you do for us as a company as well. All right. You’re welcome.

Episode 218: Entrepreneur Sleep: How To Thrive As A Peak Performer – with April Beach and Mollie McGlocklin

Mollie McGlocklin SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs Club on Clubhouse to join an upcoming room with Mollie and April

Who This Episode is Great For:

If you’re a sleepless entrepreneur, this show is for you.


Sleep is affecting our businesses. Whether good, or bad, your sleep is connected to your company’s performance in some capacity. And, beyond that… our health and livelihood as humans.  But we all know that, right? 
If you’re like me – You have no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know!  But this episode is different. Sleep expert, Mollie McGlocklin dives into tracking your sleep with tech, understanding Heart Rate Variability HRV, and simple small-steps you can do each day to work with your Circadian Rhythm. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how your Circadian Rhythm affects peak performance
  2. Know how to read the date from your wearable sleep technology
  3. And have basic things you can do tomorrow morning towards more productive and healthy sleep

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 218. And I’m April beach, your host founder of the suite Life company. And I am so glad to be talking to you again, usually on this show,


we’re talking about scale strategies, online, offer creation, how to create your courses or your mastermind and funnels and marketing. But we are all about building a business to give you the life that you want. And so that requires a holistic view on strategies for both business and life. And so I love doing shows like the ones that we were doing today.


And let me be completely clear with you about why this show really hits home for me. About two weeks ago, I landed in Philadelphia from Denver for a weekend to visit my oldest son who plays lacrosse for the university of Delaware. And I was on my laptop. The whole entire time got out of the airport, got in the rental car, turned on clubhouse,


and I was really tired. You guys, I had just gotten to this point where I had been going, going, going, by the way, I thrive on going, going, going, but I turn on clubhouse and I was browsing through the rooms of what I should listen to. And there was a room that popped up regarding sleep and it really hit home for me because I knew that this is something that I do not do well in this area.


Now a little bit more behind the scenes. I don’t like sleeping. I love being awake. I do really well from 10:00 PM to 1:00 AM. You know, the world falls away, everything’s silent. And that’s when I really thrive as a creator, frankly. And so I would much rather be awake living life than be sleeping. And that’s the way I’ve been my whole entire life,


but it’s really taken a toll on me and let’s even go a little bit deeper in transparency behind the scenes. What I used to think when people talked about, Oh, you know, I hit quote unquote, that wall. These are the things that I thought, Oh, you’re going to love me. Or you are totally going to hate me and never listened to this podcast.


Again, here’s the honest truth. When I heard anybody say or tell their stories about how they got like super tired and hit a wall. These were the things that went through my head, keeping it real. I thought I am stronger than those people. I thought that will never happen to me. And I thought I am born to thrive in like this balls to the wall type of a life.


It’s always how I have been. I love living like this. These people just aren’t built like me. Okay. Talk about really, really judgmental. And that’s when things like hit us on the face because it is in the face because that’s exactly what happened to me in over the last couple of months, I have gotten completely exhausted. The second part of this and why this episode is so important to me personally right now is that I lost my father to dementia.


And I realized that the way my brain is functioning is not the same way. It was 10 to 12 years ago. And for whatever obvious reasons that is, you know, age, maybe being one of them, I’m not taking care of my brain. And it is one of my greatest assets. And so when I heard our guests today speak on this clubhouse room about sleep.


I knew that I personally needed for her to come in here and deliver some insane wisdom to me as a CEO, as a business owner. And I believe that there are some of you guys out there that need to hear this message and what she’s talking about as well. Now here’s the deal. If you’re like me, you haven’t seriously, no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know that you aren’t doing right?


But this episode is different. Our guest today is going to dive into tracking your sleep and understanding technology behind sleep trackers. And she’s talking about simple steps, okay? Simple things that you can do. You know, we’re not going to come in here in this show saying you got to get sleep, but that’s not at all with this show is about,


which is why I personally appreciate this episode so much. So let me introduce you to who our guest expert is today. Molly McLaughlin is a creator of sleep as a skill, a company that optimizes people’s sleep through a unique blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change. She created this company from her own experience when she literally has had not slept well her entire life,


she had massive, poor sleep habits. And all of a sudden she found herself in for months. She dealt with insomnia in her background is in behavioral change. And so she went down this rabbit hole to figure out like, what is going on with these disturbances in my sleep. And she really went in a way that did not include sleep AIDS. And because of her experience,


now this company was born and she is an absolute expert at helping you know, how to really get the sleep that you need and understand sleep. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So at the end of this episode, you will know how your circadian rhythm affects your peak performance. You will know how to read the data from your wearable technology,


which was super cool because I wear sleep technology, but frankly, I really didn’t understand how to read the data. And so that is very cool. We’re talking about this on today’s show as well. And you’re going to walk away with some basic things you can do. First thing tomorrow morning to move towards more productive sleep in more healthy sleep. So here are the background notes,


everything we’re talking about, including a link to join the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club in clubhouse, where Molly and I are going to be going live. And she’s going to be chatting with you about your Entrepreneur sleep and peak performance questions can be found by visiting the show notes for this episode. There’s a lot of things in here and even more tools that Molly’s given you.


So if you want to know more about, we’re talking about Connect with Molly further, be part of this conversation and frankly learn right alongside me, visit Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. So let’s go ahead and dive in with Molly.<inaudible> All right. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast.


I am so excited to be joined by my guest today. I’m actually found her on clubhouse. Many of you know, who’ve been listening that I am bingeing clubhouse and can’t get enough of it. And this is exactly why, because I get to dive into spaces that I never would have been able to before in find people like Molly. How do you say your last name off?


Yes. Perfect McLaughlin. Absolutely. Yes, I know. Is it phonetic? Is it not? Yes. And find people like Molly McLaughlin. I am so excited to welcome you here on this show. Can you introduce everybody to your area of expertise in super power? And just give us a little bit of background before we dive into what we’re talking about today.


Absolutely. Thank you so much for having me here. This has already been a pleasure. I can’t wait to get into more with you. I am the creator of a company called sleep is a skill that helps people optimize their sleep through a blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change, and a little bit background on me and why I’m so obsessed with the topic of sleep and why it’s totally changed.


My life is that for so many years, I did everything not to do for your sleep. You know, every article you read what to do. I was doing the opposite in a lot of ways, but it really didn’t think it was much of a problem. I didn’t think much of it at all. Living in Manhattan as an entrepreneur, burning the candle at both ends stressed to the max.


And I just thought of my sleep as a lot of labels. I thought of it as I’m a night owl, I’m a short sleeper. I’m not the greatest sleeper. Oh, it must be in my jeans. That’s just how it is for me. And, and you know, a number of different things, but didn’t think of it as something that I would have much of a say of how to transform.


And I didn’t correlate when I was starting to get more and more sick at different things, you know, just getting run down anxious. I had guessed straight as I had shingles. I had a number of things that were just indicators, right. That you are stressed and things are not working. So, so yeah, and then it was not until I went through my own period of insomnia while traveling internationally.


So in different countries, you know, not speaking the same language and I cannot sleep. And it was really a lot of the entrepreneurship part of it that, you know, our businesses weren’t ready to be taken on the road yet. My fiance and I, and how it manifested was suddenly I can’t sleep. And the amount of anxiety that was happening during that period,


I went to the doctors in Croatia, got, you know, with Google translate and leave with their version of Ambien. And in that moment, kind of like, what is the game plan here am. I’m supposed to just take something like this for the rest of my life, that doesn’t align with my identity of who I think of myself and yet I’m desperate to sleep.


So what do I do? So what ended up happening was really just getting up under this area, going really down the rabbit hole of what it would take from a, what I learned to chronobiology and circadian rhythm perspective to transform my sleep. And then from that place, it really just snowballed into like podcasts, newsletters, courses, all of the things.


Okay. So you said so many things and we’re just going to kind of come together and pack it. But right now, I mean, your super power is helping high performers and entrepreneurs and small business owners have a healthy life and sleep. Yeah. That we all identify just like you said, I mean, I am you back in the past, right?


I definitely, I do not sleep as much. It goes in flows. I have an inconsistent sleep. You know, I have kids which brings a whole nother dynamic into that and I travel about five months a year. So with that being said, I think I have like a recipe for disaster relief disaster. And so I’m so excited to learn from you today.


And I know our listeners too, are going to be like, Oh yeah, that’s probably me. I’m like, so let’s start by just really unpacking this. So you said circadian rhythm. What is that for anybody that is not really aware of that term and what part of our bodies function in that capacity? How does that work? Yes. Perfect.


And I also want to say for what you’re sharing too, despite that being one of the lowest points at the time of my life was what it felt like, you know, just nothing is working. This is the worst thing is horrible. And yet I do now look back on it as being one of the best things that could have happened to me.


So if you are at any given spot in your journey around sleep, I think there really is so much to learn from it. It really, no pun intended woke me up and had me transform my life in ways that I don’t think I would have, unless it was at such a rock bottom place. So having said that, Well, just along the lines to thank you for saying that.


Cause I do feel like, I mean, I’m really transparent here with our listeners on the podcast. I mean, I do feel like, like I had hit a wall, I just turned 45 this week and I’ve always been able to push and push and push on a high performer, had tons of energy, always been able to do it. And it was just finally a couple of months ago as a first time in my whole entire life where I was so tired and I couldn’t push through,


I’ve still always been able to do that. I like, literally couldn’t think I literally couldn’t speak, like the words were coming out of my mouth incorrectly, but it was the first time ever where I feel like I hit that wall and I couldn’t keep pushing it forward. And so I knew at that point in time, and this was prior to Christmas that like,


I’m not healthy. I’m like, it doesn’t matter. I go to the gym every single day. All those things don’t matter. Like I knew that I was literally aging my brain and frankly, as with my father had dementia and these are all things that I’m starting to think about. And I’m saying, listen, I have really hit this wall and I need to sleep.


This is no longer something that, and I don’t want any of our listeners too. And this is the whole point of the show. Like, don’t get to the point that Molly did. Don’t you get to the point where I am, where I’m like stalking this woman on clubhouse. You guys help me. I have hit a wall. So we don’t want you to have to be to the point where I frankly am literally at this recording and where Molly was,


because how much more are you capable of being before you ever, ever get here and so on and so forth. So thank you for saying that. And that’s why I stopped you. Yeah, absolutely. It’s really important because I won, you know, I was reading nonstop, all these different things around how to improve my sleep and speaking with all these different experts and one thought leader in this area had made the point that when your sleep is not working,


there’s something that your body is really trying to tell you. And I’m not trying to say that in a loose, like esoteric way or anything, but I think that’s really important because how I was running my, this didn’t come out of a vacuum. This was from, you know, years of kind of a mismanagement of my time, my days my,


you know, keep pushing it to the next level. And, and so it occurred from a snowballing of that. And so what it really took was that to actually, for me to listen. So I don’t know the plus side while I at the time didn’t want to go through it. It actually was a blessing. And so I hope that there can be that message and that there is,


there are so many success stories on the other side of people being able to shift this area. So one, I acknowledge you for the sharing and the, the vulnerability there, because it’s so important. And to, you know, so then the, how, so what you said about the circadian rhythm, why this is important in this conversation is one just to kind of bring it back to the basics.


So no matter where you’re at and where your sleep journey is that we can always start to come back to one that this is a skill that, okay, so this is learnable. So let’s just let’s learn. So from the strategic rhythm perspective, one that exists on a spectrum was something that I didn’t understand. So the circadian rhythm is this 24 hour rhythm as human beings that we function within.


But that rhythm, the queuing system for that rhythm can either be on the spectrum of, from a strong side or weak side. And you might be falling somewhere in between that spectrum. Then I would make the argument that many of us are on the weaker side of that just as a modern society, how we’re, how we’re functioning and as diurnal creatures.


Yeah. This is all kind of coming from this concept around chronobiology the science of really time and how that impacts our biology as diurnal creatures. We are meant to be active during the day and at rest at night. And of course, in my example, I was doing the opposite, like, you know, upside down living. So we’re looking to,


how can we bring things back and align with those cue givers that will help our rhythms be strong? So we, you know, those people, those friends of ours that might go out, everyone goes out and out super late, but they still wake up at the exact same time, you know, early morning. And you’re like, how are they doing that?


That’s crazy. That’s actually what we’re looking to train for is that kind of specificity around just the automaticity of waking up routinely going to sleep routinely around the same times, but there’s tons of things we can do to get to there. Okay. Fascinating. And I know those people I’m married to one of those people that it doesn’t matter what time he goes to sleep.


It is like, this is what time he gets up every single day. Yeah. Okay. So talk to us about, you know, really why is this important for fully understanding for those higher achievers busy entrepreneurs? How does this fit into our, you know, whole life business strategy? Because to me, as a business strategist, the way I need to form it within my own brain is say,


this is part of my strategic business in life design. This is just as important is marketing and selling and other things. So it’s a very holistic approach to business and life. And so how for entrepreneurs and small business owners are really just high achievers who are listening to this, why is this so important? How does this really affect their everyday? And honestly their profit and their performance.


I mean, that’s what we’re really getting down to get to if that’s the driver great, that’s the driver, are you not making as much money as you could be because frankly you aren’t sleeping. Right. I’m sure that there’s some data and some correlation there. Absolutely. Well, so there’s so many places we can go with that, but I can just even say anecdotally that my fiance owns companies that help train poker players at the table that are high stakes,


lots of stress, and how to make those decisions, that their decisions in their thinking from a cognitive athlete perspective will impact, you know, possibly thousands and millions of dollars as a result. Right? So one of the first places that they begin is the sleep optimization perspective. And I work with tons of poker players in the management of that. And so I share that just because that’s a very tangible experience of at the table,


you can either walk away with lots of money or not. And so it’s kind of entrepreneurial in nature, but you apply that in the high stakes of your days of your, you know, business interactions with people and just that cognitive ability to show up consistently and reliably, like, you know, so in the example of myself for years, I, there wouldn’t be accountable illness around how I would be when I’d wake up in the morning.


It wouldn’t be like, Oh, okay. So for that next, really important client call or what have you, I will be bringing my a game. It wasn’t like that. It was like, I hope I get a good night’s sleep and you know that I can have that functionality. Right. Like, That’s me, I’m raising my hand. If you guys are watching the video,


it’s like, this is me. Yeah, for sure. Yes, exactly. Cause that, you know, and there’s tons of studies that will point to this. So whether it just error rates, if you’re sleep deprived and the amount of errors that you might make, if you’re taking scent, you know, test, or this is important for pilots,


you know, these would become life or death elements, but certainly from a productivity perspective, like you’re gonna have all your faculties available to you in those really times. So just to scale it back, I think of it as a couple of things. One, I think of it as super, super important for that productivity perspective. And also because I had so much of that mental health component in there with anxiety and stress and moodiness and crankiness and freak out,


then, then with that just, it provides for me just a really important space to be at a equilibrium with how I’m approaching the world around me and stress levels and anxiety levels. And we can get into some of the wearable indicators for that. So it’s not so esoteric. It really has some kind of quantified data behind it. Right. Okay. So yeah,


let’s go ahead and do that actually. Can you, I definitely want to talk about the wearables at the time of this recording. Probably if you’re listening to this six months or eight months from now, the wearable part will probably not be accurate enough today because the technology is evolving. And that’s what we’re kind of talking about behind the scenes, but let’s go ahead.


Can you start just by sharing a couple of steps for those of our listeners who listened, they’re like, okay, this is, I am April right now. I mean, just tell me like, what should I be doing to get on top of this, the process of bringing this into order. Yes. Great. Okay. So step number one.


What I actually say is despite the fact that a lot of what I’ll be talking about from the circadian rhythm kind of lifestyle perspective is that a lot of it’s kind of how to harken back to almost Hunter gatherer days and like, you know, aligning with sunrise and sunset. I’m not saying everyone needs to rise with the sun. I’m not making that at all,


but I’m saying that there’s a lot of things we can do to bring about that workability with those rhythms of nature, because that’s going to really result in higher sleep efficiency and quality of our sleep. And at the very same time, despite the fact that I’m saying that I’m also gonna promote the marriage of technologies. And so much of this technology is at the source of our kind of being off-kilter with the,


that relationship, ironically, then bringing in tech, I’ve found to really make a difference to game-ify this. So again, you know, down the road, you’re listening. What I would say is the first place to begin is a logging system of where your sleep is at right now is really, really eyeopening to people because often people say, I know I’m not sleeping well,


but then we try to get up under will. How much, how many hours are we sleeping? What times are we sleeping? How many wake ups, what’s your sleep onset look like? All of these sorts of things. And a lot of it is like, well, I don’t know some gray areas, a lot of question marks because it is it’s,


it’s such a hard area to track. So getting a proper or getting a sleep tracker of whatever at the time of listening to this is known to be one of the most effective on the market at the moment. Right. And follow them On Instagram or club ads. Cause I’m sure she’ll be up to date with this. So yes it is. She will.


I’m sure be talking about what is the most up-to-date thing when you are listening to this episode? Yes. I’m often fondly known as gadget girl by the end of the clubhouse. So we were talking about that was my name and not from a perspective that these are infallible, there’s still things you don’t want to just blindly listen to whatever stats are coming back.


You want to be aware of what they’re good at, what they’re not so good at, but either way, what they tend to be pretty solid at is are you asleep or are you awake? What time does that look like? But then also some health metrics that indicate the, your recovery that you attained throughout the course of the night. So all of those things will give us,


you know, kind of a window or insight into your sleep. So I say, start with that first place because, and years back, what it was, one of the first recommendation was keep a sleep diary, you know, write it out manually. And now you could do that, but also, you know, to begin to start tracking, it will be automated for you and often provide a way more insight that you might be surprised by some blind spots.


And along those lines, I have a question for you about one of those metrics with one of my slit trackers that I, that I had used in the past. And you mentioned it when, before we started recording this, which was heart rate variability, can you explain? I mean, I saw it on my sleep tracker. I, when I’m like Googling it online,


it was actually really hard for me to understand why that was so important. Can yes, it was a one Oh one on that. I’m so glad you said that. So this metric, this one metric you could devote into multiple podcasts, there’s actually entire podcasts that just talk about how to kind of understand this one metric and influence it. You’re not alone in the confusion of it better.


I’m like, why don’t I get it? So it, but it’s the reason why it’s I foresee one, it’s already ballooned in popularity around understanding this. And I foresee it being even more and more influential in our health. So the one, what is it? It’s heart rate variability HRV is basically the time interval in between your heartbeat and indicator of your recovery.


So if you can think of heart rate as kind of your load, that’s put on to you, you know, moment to moment, then HRV is reflective of how quickly can you recover from moment to moment? So it’s recovery of both mental elements of recovery, but also physical elements of recovery. And that physical can be about like the foods you’re eating the workouts,


you’re doing the air quality in your space, preexisting conditions that you might have going on. But then the mental component is really eye-opening to just how you’re relating to the world around you as entrepreneurs to, Oh my goodness. Like that can be really eyeopening. You get a lot of stuff on your plate and suddenly that that number will show that impact. And that can be a really cool way for those of us that might want to do that.


Push through, push through mindset. And I’m so one of those to start to respect the importance for recovery time and almost relating to our body, like an athlete would to build in that really next level of recovery so that you can take on all the things you gotta take off. Okay. Yeah. And I can see that I do understand a certain aspect and the correlation of that because when I used to train for fitness competitions and we used to do the heart rate training,


and when you know, between the things I was doing, like how fast would my heart recover between sets? And so is that kind of the same thing that we’re talking about here that’s happening in sleep that we’re measuring? Yes, exactly. So that’s why a lot of people are excited about particularly longitudinal nocturnal HRV. So there’s, you can measure, of course your HRV 24 seven and the nighttime HRV can be really eye-opening because that’s giving us an indication while there’s not presumably as much noise that’s happening because there’s a lot of noise on your measurement of your HRV during the day.


Cause you’re, you’re eating, you’re, you’re talking, you’re working out all these things. Whereas when you’re sleeping, presumably that’s largely recovery time and that is what HRV is all about. But so if you wake up and traditionally, this is very simplified because there’s way more nuances to this metric, but often the higher it is from your baseline, the more recovered you are and the more you see it kind of dipped down,


then that can often indicate that you are being more taxed, you’re stressed or you’re getting sick. So it’s actually really popular right now. That’s why it’s trending to with COVID that a lot of people are looking to this as indicators and days in advance of when you might even feel that you’re getting rundown, that that number is shifting. Then that can be a signal to really prioritize that recovery.


So those are just some of the ways that you can relate to it. But in the practical application, what I see with my clients is so all the clients are wearing wearables. They’ll see, Oh my God, my HRV is really dipping like significantly. So then they’ll prioritize recovery from whatever that looks like. So if they’re big time athletes, then they will adjust their training to really lower that.


And to take that off time, if they’re just entrepreneurs and they might kind of scale back some of their calls or what have you to really make a difference with that number and then get recovered in a way that can make a difference. The following day, That’s amazing. This is so much great information. Okay. So number one, log, make sure that we’re paying attention to what we’re doing.


Get a wearable let’s, you know, we’re not going to do with the archaic way of tracking when we go to sleep. I mean, there is just absolutely so much data out there that I’m hearing you say that it’s important for us to track know and be able to understand so that we can adjust things. So what else would you recommend for those people who are listening after they go through these first steps?


Like what type of common adjustments are typically? I know every single person is different, but are typically beneficial that you have seen with high performers and entrepreneurs. Yeah. So one asterisk that I would put for the wearables is just ensuring that you’re, we’re not getting like a no CBO effect by saying, Oh my God, I have so many friends that literally would come because I’m only getting 20 minutes of deep sleep,


30 minutes of REM or whatever. And so one just know that as of, at least this time, the recording, most of the hand and wrist wearables, they are said so much great information. I love what is available there. And the sleep stage classification in particular. So knowing is this deep is this Ram is this light, it’s not the best.


So to not get yourself all riled up around that part, instead focus on those basics that we talked about, what time did you go to sleep? What time did you wake up? And then some of those recovery metrics, so to stay in that zone. So that’s just my aspect around that. But then what I would say for, for all humans and particularly entrepreneurs is this concept of circadian rhythm.


Entrainment is really, really valuable to have a framework by which you set up your days so that you can strengthen that circadian rhythm. So you can be like your husband, right. And just kind of the goal is to be like your husband and to basically wake up around the same time off to go to bed at the same time, all of that comes from that.


So this is actually a term you can find in any kind of chronobiology textbook of understanding that you are in training your circadian rhythm, but that is from a number of what they call time givers that are external to you, that you are playing a role in from a behavioral perspective of getting so a couple of those that’ll just rattle off real quick. The top down most important one is light,


particularly sunlight. And the timing of that. So if you get nothing out of what I’m saying, then I would definitely say that first thing in the morning, how to train yourself to get even just a few minutes. I mean, ideal would be more, but a few minutes of sunlight outside. And unfortunately behind a window, doesn’t really count. It counts,


but takes much, much longer estimates with Jamie’s ICER out of Stanford, puts it at anywhere from 50 to a hundred times a longer to reset your master clock each morning, if you’re getting sunlight behind a window versus outside. So you want to just get yourself outside, but also expose particularly your eyes to that morning, sunlight, you know, you want it to be wherever you might be on the globe.


We’re aiming for that to be in the morning hours usually before like 10:00 AM of getting that morning light. And the reason for that is that behind your eyes is the super charismatic nucleus, which is your master clock that influences all your peripheral clocks as to what time it is. And why that’s important is then a whole cascade of kind of hormones and functionality happened based on what time the body perceives it to be.


And so we want it to be as consistent, those triggering systems as possible. So that’s that light in the morning and then dosing it throughout the day. But then you want as bright days as possible and as dim nights as possible. And when I say dim, it’s like post sunset, you want to be getting, I mean, really the, the actual recommendation is like candles,


but I know that’s not always so practical. So even like, I got like red lights over here. So, you know, you can, that can be another thing that you can bring in if you’re not willing to do the candles. But so we’re looking for very, very dim lighting that allow us to have our cake and eat it too. So versus like how things used to be sun would set.


We kind of go to sleep not long after for thousands of years now, we want to be able to still like, you know, do things, but we don’t want to impact our melatonin production. So that kind of red light candles or worst case scenario, incandescent lights that have more red in them, those can make a difference. So that getting that light right,


and then the next step would be temperature. So being mindful of really having this arc of your body temperature throughout the course of the day. So high temperature throughout the day movement activity, eating, you know, having engaging in lots of dynamic, cognitively demanding tasks, all those things during the day. But then in the evening, shifting over to fasting,


you know, relaxation, resting, connecting kind of calming everything down. So for entrepreneurs, what we do is create really like say layout of your day, where you have a set wake up time, he was set bedtime. And then from that place that had a Creek kind of two parts of your day, like a day mode and a night mode.


And then even just these little things like understanding like, Oh my God, when I have my food will influence the timing of when I fall asleep. And when I wake up and, or the amounts of wake-ups that I have throughout the night, things of this nature can be super, super empowering for people I learned so much. I never knew that about the sun in the morning.


Thank you so much. I’m like, literally I’m here taking notes. It’s just incredibly fascinating. And so the sun and the light, obviously all makes sense now that you explained that, but that would never be anything that would be, you know, just obviously common knowledge to those of us who aren’t experts like you. And so thank you so much for sharing that.


Okay. You have given us a ton of information. I have one last question that I’m curious about how you’re going to answer. Obviously I don’t know it, and that’s why I’m asking it. Is there a minimum amounts of sleep that general and I’m sure everybody’s different, but generally speaking that you believe people need to function in a healthy capacity. Oh yeah.


That’s the million dollar question. Everyone wants to know that one for sure. And you know, so some of the, the known recommendations are having us as it, a healthy adult, as it changes throughout the years, basically what age you are. But as a healthy adult than getting anywhere from seven to nine is the recommended amount that we’ll have thrown out.


There are other people that will speak to that you can, for some people might make sense to be in the, you know, six is range and what have you, based on their, the quality of that sleep. So I will say that it’s kind of split on that, that topic, but certainly what you can do is through the tracking element of things,


start to get up under that. The more we have some of these kind of top down, most important things addressed, then what often begins to emerge because, you know, sometimes you got to get past all of this sleep deprivation and built up time of variability, of sleeping all kinds of hours, and then not enough and ups and downs. So once we start having those structures often,


what emerges is more of your kind of set point for your sleep at the age that you’re at and at the health level and energy expenditure that you’re at each day. So you can have a clear understanding of that once everything else just kind of falls into order as well, is what I’m hearing you say. Okay, I lied. I have one, one more question.


Can you catch up on sleep? Mm, yeah. Good question. I know. Cause then it’s like that sleep debt topic was very popular for a number of years. So that is another one that is a bit of a point of contention, but there’s different schools of thought so well, if we go back to the conversation around dementia that you mentioned,


that’s a really big topic that’s come out of. This looks like a really strong correlation between sleep deprivation and neurodegenerative disorders. So whether it’s Parkinson’s, Alzheimer’s dementia, different things of that nature really linked because of the lack of proper cleaning. So glymphatic drainage was the coin, the term that was coined around this. So glymphatic drainage meaning versus lymphatic it’s glymphatic and glymphatic is the cleansing process of the brain each night during sleep,


during deep sleep in particular. And what it’s doing is it’s basically rinsing out with a janitorial process of your brain, of the buildup of waste products in the brain each night. And that’s what amyloid beta plaques are. Basically what’s left over. It’s a kind of calcification in the brain if we’re not having that proper amount. So the concern, so the reason I mentioned that is that we don’t see a lot of great ways to counteract that.


So say if you’ve been doing that for years and years, and there’s this buildup of this kind of a dirty brain, if you will, that buildup, and it’s very similar to brains that we see for late stage Alzheimer’s dementia or what have you. It looks a hand in hand and we don’t have a really strong way to then reverse that. So what I would say,


even from that perspective alone, is that we don’t want to rely on this kind of messy relationship to sleep where I’ll make up for it on the weekends, or what have you, because also if we just get back to the basics of what we know for great sleep, that the more we have that variability and the up and downs, one of the term for it is actually social jet lag.


And so social jet lag being this concept that, you know, Oh, around five days of the week, I’m really great with my sleep. I do pretty consistent, but then on the weekends, you know, I want to let loose and then you stay up late and it’s like three hours difference and, or more or whatever. And so with that,


then it’s, you’re having the experience that’s similar to, from a biological perspective, similar to jet lag. When you try to get yourself back on your normal schedule on Sunday night or Monday or whatever, but you didn’t go anywhere, but you’re still having that negative impact on your body. So the long and the short of it is it doesn’t seem to be a reliable method to build that sleep debt and kind of knock it out by having these long stretches of sleep.


Because then that also impacts cause quality sleep is a measurement of how your sleep was the night before the night before that. And they, before that. So it kind of all plays a role in there. So if you didn’t sleep so well, one night, often people will benefit from what’s known as kind of rebound sleep because you now, the body is really craving to get itself back on track and it will,


you know, kind of greedily get the sleep staging that it needs, but you can’t rely on that as a sustainable element because then that throws off your circadian rhythm. And now you’re getting tired at the same time. And it’s so frustrating. Right? All of that makes sense. Oh, thank you so much. I learned so much today. Thank you so much for being a guest on the show and we’re going to make sure everybody knows how to find you in the show notes,


but can you tell everybody who’s listening to this? Like, Oh my gosh, I need more of Molly. I need her help. I need her in my life. You know, what does that look like? How can people work with you more? Yeah. Well, number one, just thank you so much for having me. Thank you so much for your also just transparency and vulnerability about how you’re relating to your sleep.


And, you know, just gives us all hope in these different periods when we are struggling to hear, okay, I’m not alone. Cause you know, that’s really what I was dealing with with my sleep. So, and it’s takes courage to share that cause you could be like, Oh yeah, I’ve got my whole life together. And dah, dah,


dah. So, you know, I really, really admire that. So great work with that. And then yes, if you are struggling with your sleep, this is a real mission-based thing for me. so1@sleepasaskill.com, there’s lots of things that are available for free. We have a weekly newsletter, so I call it Molly’s Monday obsessions, cause I’m pretty obsessive about this topic.


And so all of these, you know, things that I’m obsessing about in the world of sleep and also kind of asleep experiments, lots of graphs and fun charts and whatever. And so that’s every Monday when you sign up for that, you also get a free downloadable PDF. That’s optimized bedroom, how to optimize your sleep environment comes right along. And then we also have a sleep assessment that you can take.


So whatever you’re dealing with with your sleep, then that will get you some kind of tailored advice around those areas. We have weekly podcasts with different sleep experts and you know, sleep tech and what have you. So all of that is available for free. And we put out a lot on social media and we’re really amping that up as well. And then if you are really struggling,


you need more than that. Then we do have courses and one-on-ones and different ways of working together as well. Wow. All right. Thank you so much, Molly. I’m definitely going there and I appreciate your time and your expertise and pouring into me and our whole entrepreneur community. And I am sure that this is going to be an important topic. It has been,


but really, as you said, moving forward. So we just really appreciate your expertise and, and being here with us today and it was such a pleasure to get to meet you same here. Thank you so much. You are welcome. Thank you.<inaudible> What a great show. Thank you so much for learning alongside me and hanging out. Most likely you knew a lot about this information.


Probably a lot more than I did, but it’s just such a pleasure to, to learn. And I took a million notes if you’d like to join Molly and me in a clubhouse room where we are talking all about sleep, wearable technology and all these things so that you can function at your peak performance as an entrepreneur, whatever that looks like for you go to sweet life,


community dot and There you can join by link our clubhouse club. You still need to join separately on clubhouse if you’re not a member, but you’re going to get an email with reminders and, and an invitation to this room with a direct link to this room. So again, you can go to sweet life, community.com to join our Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse to talk to Molly live about this.


And of course, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. Have a great day. And I’ll talk to you guys soon.

Episode 211: How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking – with April Beach and Heather Sager

Heather Sager SweetLife Entpreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Grab Heather’s FREE training: How to Build Authority as a Speaker WITHOUT Second Guessing What You Say

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to get in front of your ideal audience and establish yourself as an expert in your space but you’re not exactly sure how to go about it through the process of speaking. 


If you’re an entrepreneur and you’re looking to get in front of your ideal audience, establish yourself as a trusted source and solution, and sell more of your signature programs, services or offers, speaking is a great way to do that. However there are strategic steps that should be followed in order to achieve your ideal outcome, and what we learn in speaking to this week’s guest is that you can actually send clients away by saying the wrong things.
And this week’s show, Heather Seger, strategic speaking advisor, guides you through her four-step Speak for Authority method to fill your programs using speaking. Heather also dives into statistics speakers need to know, how to tell the right story, and expert insights to make sure you are speaking up in the right way, to the right audience, about the right topics. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the four steps to the “speak for authority method”
  2. Know how to nail your message
  3. And understand quick strategies to choose your signature talk topic

Resources Mentioned:

Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 211, And then I’m April beach. Super great to be connected with you today. We are diving in and we’re talking about how to fill your programs using guest speaking.


And we have Heather Sager, the one and only in the house. So what you can expect from today’s show is if you are a coach or a consultant, and you’re really good at what you do, even the leading expert in your space, but you’re having trouble getting noticed will speaking could be a really powerful way to establish yourself as a leader and get in front of the perfect audience.


And so today we’re talking all about the steps to do that and giving you the methodology from the expert herself, Heather Sager, but real quick, before we jump into that, if you’re new to hearing the show welcome, this is the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast, and we give you step-by-step business trainings that are so good. There’s no way they should be free.


You can find all the resources we have by visiting sweet life co.com. And if you’re interested in scaling your business, developing your signature program, signature method, signature offers in truly scaling your business to live life on your terms for massive profit. Then we would love to help you get to that place. Visit Sweetlife co.com and that is our Ninja skill. And that’s what we do.


All right, diving into today’s episode. This is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my start to scale up system. So we like to tag these episodes in advance. So, you know, whether or not this is really a good, good opportunity for you to learn and grow based on the phase of business you’re in. So if you weren’t sure what phase of business you’re in and therefore what you should be focusing on right now,


you can go and take a very short quiz just by visiting sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And we’ll give you a full download of exactly where you are in your business, growth and development in exactly what you should be focusing on right now, so that you can grow your company faster. So that’s one resource I wanted to share with you. And along those lines of this particular episode is for those of you who are in phases two,


three or four of that start to scale up system. So hopefully that will equip you to know whether or not you should hang out with us any longer. And I’ll tell you if you’re in this phase, you are not going to want to miss this episode. And one other quick housekeeping announcement. I know that we have probably been talking about clubhouse way too much,


but I wanted to let you know that you can connect with us and connect with our suite life podcast, guests experts. By following me on clubhouse, I am at April beach on clubhouse, and we now host a weekly room at 12 o’clock, every single Wednesday. And that is Eastern standard time. So if you want to be on the hot seat,


if you want my eyes and your business to help you strategize your next steps, find us on clubhouse and subscribe to our clubhouse updates. If you are not on clubhouse yet, or if you just want the updates you can visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And we’ll keep you in the loop of what’s happening on clubhouse while you might be waiting to get on the app and we will send you reminders and invitations to our upcoming rooms.


So I know that was a lot of information and you can find all the information I just shared with you and the resources for these show notes, which is going to be@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two 11. Okay, let me introduce you to our fabulous guest on today’s show. You get to hear from Heather Sager. Heather helps entrepreneurs structure their ideas, clarify their message and hone their speaking skills so they can deliver a magnetic live presentations,


videos, and workshops to grow their authority, whether on a physical or a virtual stage, she’s spoken on stages around the world. Teaching six to seven figure business owners, how to grow their company using effective communication. She also works one-on-one with business owners to prep them for the stage and help you manage and prepare your message for the most impact. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.


Again, all of those amazing resources that I shared and everything we’re talking about with Heather can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two 11.<inaudible>. All right, you guys welcome back to another awesome episode here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur business podcast. And I am visited today by none other than Heather Sager in what we’re talking about is something that’s so important.


I know many of you guys have questions about, so we are immediately diving into how to fill your programs using guests speaking. So Heather, thank you so much for being on the show today. Give yourself an awesome intro, an intro that you deserve because you are a very powerful at getting people amazing results and tell everybody about what you do. Thank you so much.


I’m thrilled to be here. Thanks for the chance to serve your audience today and talk about pressure on an intro. I mean, I mean, honest, I will say behind the scenes, so I have followed Heather on Instagram and it’s one of those things where you’ve been connected and a little bit connected, but not completely connected. And I knew that you guys needed to hear from Heather.


So very excited to have you here. Thank you. Thank you for that. So, as April said, I’m Heather Sager. So I’m a coach for online Entrepreneurs and essentially what that means. I always joke that I teach people how to do the thing that most people fear more than death, which is public speaking and in the online space. It’s kind of funny because we think about public speaking back.


If y’all worked in corporate ever, how you think about getting up in front of a group and giving a presentation or teaching a workshop, or we think about speakers as the people who live their life on the road at conferences on big stages. And none of those things seem to really fit in the online space of coaches and course creators and online entrepreneurs. And what I like to remind people is the fact that as business owners,


we speak to people every single day. So we are already speakers. It’s not like a label that we just, all of a sudden adopt. We’re already speakers. And so I, what I do is I teach people how to do it with intention and purpose. So what they speak about actually connects back to not only what they’re passionate about, but also what they do in their business.


I think your voice has the potential to be a magnet for other people, for them to go, Ooh, I’m not only do I like her. I want to learn more from her. And the more that you get out and use your voice on different platforms, the more you pull people back with you that they’ll want to join your programs and hang out with you more and buy from you.


So that’s what I do. My background is my many entrepreneurs is incorporat where for years I spoke on stages around the world as a corporate trainer, where I taught actually entrepreneurs in the medical space. So doctors and their teams, I taught them customer service and sales to very taboo topics in the medical space tell you, as a 27 year old kid, it felt like teaching doctors how to sell,


how to talk about what they did, how to talk to their teams, how to talk to their patients. That was an intimidating task at hand. So I had to learn how to speak in a very different way. I had to learn how to be influential and persuasive with an audience who was highly skeptical of my experience, my age, everything about me.


And so that’s where I got my like big girl chops around speaking. That’s where I had to fight through all my own insecurities about being a, I was talking about being like a baby nugget on a stage being an unexperienced or inexperienced professional. Like I had to work through all of those mental issues. We go through. I had to do that in a very highly publicized,


highly criticized space, but I did damn good job. And I realized that while I love my job as a trainer, what I really loved was teaching people how to use their voice for good. And I got really good at storytelling. I got really good at the body language and the hand gestures and all those things that come with speaking that are more than just the message.


And I started getting people asking me, could you teach me how to do that on a stage? Or could you teach me how to lead a workshop? And I found all of my free time in corporate was teaching my peers and other businesses how to do what I was doing. And at some point I was like, I don’t want to do this for anybody else anymore.


Why don’t I just do this full time? So I made the leap like many do, which is, let me start my own business and help other people do the thing that I love. But here’s the kicker. It wasn’t just about speaking. It was about speaking with purpose because I think speaking is like gasoline on a fire. I think speaking is one of the best marketing strategies that we can use in our business.


And I think people treat it as a skill, but speaking, it’s actually a strategy. So many things that I want to say, right, right now about all those things. First of all, now you guys know I wanted Heather on the show buyer that was like, okay, we can just end it, just go work with other, and she’s going to help you be just this insane speaker,


but you don’t really, you said so many things though. So as business developers and obviously that’s what we do at the Sweetlife company, we help people develop their programs and we help them develop life-changing programs and offers and these amazing services. Right. And one of the things that they are always asking about is, but how do I separate myself from other businesses that are delivering the same type of results besides doing it within the framework of my program?


Like how do I stand out? And it always comes back to taking the authority on what, you know, in stepping out and speaking about it. So that’s the first thing. And I can’t wait to dive into the strategies we’re going to talk about here today on the show, but something else that you said that it’s so true is that you’re speaking to people all the time.


It doesn’t always have to be a webinar or an actual live event. But when, as an online entrepreneur, when you have the opportunity to actually speak to somebody and take them on a journey that you have pre crafted, it is a skill. And that’s how you get people to follow you that are the right people. And I, I want to just kind of pause for a second saying,


even if you’re listening to the show and you’re like, wow, I, you know, speaking doesn’t fit into my business model, listen to what Heather’s saying, because you’re already speaking. So let’s make it so you don’t suck at it, right? Let’s make every single moment that you are having the, honestly, the privilege, just like I just felt very blessed and privileged that people listened to the podcast.


Right? All of us, when somebody is listening to what we have to say, it is a very unique opportunity and a privilege to be able to speak to these people. So what we say and how we say it is incredibly, incredibly important. So just love everything that you said there. And I appreciate how direct you are about the importance of this.


So you help establish business owners really take the lead in doing so by speaking an increase. What I love of course is the sale of their programs. Talk about how you do that. You have a very special method and I’m going to tout Heather’s method here for a second. By way. If you all don’t have a method we need, we want you to have a method to make you known into gain the trust of the people.


You’re leading. Talk to us about your method in what is that called? And can you guide us through your method today? Yes. 100%. I love methods. We were sharing our love of frameworks and methods, and just easier ways to help people understand what it is you do, right? We all think things make sense in our own heads, but really our own heads are a very special place that only we understand.


So we have to be able to articulate them. So my signature method that I teach inside my program speak up to level up. It’s where I teach online course creators and coaches, how to leverage speaking in a way that’s going to grow their business. We walk through something. I call the speak for authority method. And the reason why we call it the speak for authority method is every business owner has different goals related to speaking.


Some people might be like, Hey, I want to get paid to speak $10,000 for a keynote or $40,000 for a keynote. That’s one strategy. But when it comes to speaking, there are several strategies that you can apply. One can be growing your revenue in your program. So selling from stages, another could be driving leads to your social media accounts or leads to your list or leads to your offers.


Another one could be just not peeing your pants. When you go live on a platform, it could just be growing your confidence. But I think throughout all of it, speaking is like a business card for your business and all of these, their authority boosting activities that when you grow your authority, you have the ability to charge more, get on better stages network with the people that you want to network with,


collaborate with the business partnerships you want to have when you have authority, which is clout, where people see you as the go-to in your field, it seems like doors open naturally. So if you aren’t known, if people don’t know who you are, you could be the best at what you do, but until other people point at you and say, she knows what she’s doing,


or he’s an expert in this, by the way you don’t say you’re an expert. You let other people do that for you until that moment comes. It doesn’t really matter how good your program is. You have to articulate it, make it sound like a big deal and get other people talking about it. And that’s where growing your authority becomes a really important thing.


Wow. Okay. Yeah. So talk to us about this, speak for authority method. And I love how you preface it by saying that the reason why it’s so important is because all these goals are absolutely important and they do apply probably to every single person listening to the show. So what is the first part of this method? Where does somebody start when they want to take action on that?


Yeah. You’re going to love this one because this goes right up your alley of what you teach, which is number one is nail your messaging. What I mean by that is you have to nail, who are you talking to? What do you have to offer? And how do you talk about those core offerings, your messaging? So, what’s interesting is the first time I taught my program,


when I started working with groups of entrepreneurs versus one-on-one, I started by going, let’s create your talk and I would start extracting ideas out of their head and formulating a signature talk with them. And what I realized pretty quickly was, Oh my gosh, this was the first time they were vocalizing their ideas. And some of them didn’t even have their programs fully formatted or organized in a way that really got people Results.


So I found out, you know what, when people start moving from just writing down their ideas or drawing out their ideas, when they start articulating their ideas, that’s when they realized, Oh, this either makes sense or it doesn’t. So step number one, nailing your messaging means that you are not just thinking off, like speaking off the cuff or winging it all the time.


Here’s this big myth that happens a lot of times when we see experts where we see influencers on a podcast or on a video or on clubhouse, we think, Oh, they’re just so naturally gifted. But here’s the thing. These people have been talking about these things over and over and over and over again, they know what they’re talking about. It’s not by chance.


It’s on purpose now, sometimes it’s by chance because they’ve just done it enough where they know no, but they have discovered what their core talking parts are. You have to understand what should you, and what should you not be talking about to lead people into your business, not lead them to other people’s businesses. Like there is a difference. You can talk about a lot of things,


but if you don’t have your messaging nailed, you could be providing a lot of education, but then serving them up open doors to have other people help them because they don’t realize how it connects back to you. Wow. Okay. And to totally put you on the spot here, at least as because everybody’s saying like, Oh my gosh, shoot, am I doing this?


Am I, cause everybody wants to be out there and sharing information, a great value. Can you give us an example of how sharing some information as in a particular way, may lead somebody to go work with somebody else? Yeah. I’ll give you me. It’s an example. Okay. I talk about speaking, right? And I want you to imagine speaking.


This is like this giant ocean of information. It’s in the, the marketing ocean. There’s so many different things we can speak about. And one or two times I did podcast episodes or interviews where people are like, Oh, speaking on camera, Heather, will you come talk about getting over your fear of the camera? And I’m like, sure, I love this.


This is within my wheelhouse. But what I realized is when I would start doing all these interviews that were specific to getting over your fear of the camera or going live on Facebook or all these things, which I, I do teach, what I realized was my messaging was really specific to social media speaking. And my offer is how do you speak on all kinds of stages?


Get your messaging down, use guest stages. Yes. Use your stages. But the speaking on lives and Instagram stories was such a minute point. I don’t want people to know me as the person to help you get over your fear of the camera. Like that’s not what my program is about. Even though I have episodes around it, like the messaging while it was a good,


relevant topic, it wasn’t core messaging. That’s going to drive back to my program, speak up to level up. I mean, it’s a lesson in my program, but it’s not the core concept. So I think a lot of times this thing that happens is we’re like, Oh, it’s within the wheelhouse. Well, you have to think about, is it like a neighbor down the block in your content?


Or is it like on the block, like on your street, in the house that you’re trying to attract people to. Wow. That’s so important. Okay. I’m just going to take a little, left-hand turn tangent here as we are all diving into, or as many people as we possibly can, we’re driving into clubhouse. For example, I just did the recording of this hosted a,


a welcome event room for a bunch of women entrepreneurs last night. And they were all asking, what should I be talking about in these rooms? And I felt grateful now. I didn’t totally lead them astray, but it was always coming back to cause I’m obviously not the speaking coach, but it was always like, what do you want to be known for?


And I think that this is so exactly important what you said, because there are so many things that we can talk about. I can, you know, talk about a million components of, of our program as well in, in the ways and other things that are like supporting evidence, supporting document, but not that may nugget. So what I’m hearing you say in what I want,


all of you guys to hear is what Heather saying is that go for go after what you want to be known for. This is also important why we have your signature program created so we know what we’re selling people into. So it aligns with your program so important. And I think that there are so many people that are just looking for any opportunity to get in front of an audience that they are willing to speak on.


Oh, I can speak on that. Oh sure. I can speak on that. And what you’re saying is that is not strategy. Let’s be very strategic and make sure that in the little amount of time that somebody is willing to give you attention, to hear what you have to say, that you are making a good use of that in establishing an understanding of who you are,


who your brand is and the, in the end Results you provide bingo so power. And let me give you a visual for that, because I want to make sure hearing me say, don’t ever talk about those things. Right? Okay. I want you to imagine, do you remember back in, I don’t know if some kind of math class, when we were in school,


that something called a scam. I think it’s called a scattergram. It’s like the graph that you would draw with the dots. And it’s like, when you would have a point, it’d be like all these dots that you’d look for the trends of the dots. Maybe this is a terrible example, but go with me here for a second. I’m sticking.


Yeah. You guys should see behind the scenes in the recording. I’m like, ah, So if you think about like the dots, like mapping different coordinates, but I want you thinking about is you want to map like the bulk of your coordinates. I E the bulk of your speaking to your signature offer. But if you have a little dab, like,


Ooh, I’m going to talk about this because it’s sexy or I’m going to talk like, I’ll do a room talking about how do you do your voice on clubhouse, not what I teach, but it’s a sexy topic that people want. Like if my little scattergram, gosh, I hope that’s what it’s called. If I have like a couple of beeps and boops of topics that are outside of my core,


that is not going to dilute. I’m known for, it’s just going to expand it. But if I spend too much time outside of my core topic, then I will be unforgettable because there’s no repetition on my core topic of people seeing over and over again. Oh, I want to speak on guest stages. Heather, Sagers a speaking coach for online entrepreneurs.


Oh, you want to know how you speak into this strategy? Heather, Sagers the coach to help you with that. Like you have to make sure your repetition in your wheelhouse is happening in order to earn the right to have those scattered topics. Absolutely. Awesome. Visual. Thank you so much. I have no idea what you’re talking about because frankly,


I think I was skipping school in stoned, every high school math class, but just keeping it real with that being said, I can totally get the visual and that completely makes sense. My teenage boys are going to listen to this podcast and yeah. It’s cool. Your mom’s super cool. Oh, they they’ve heard all the stories. Okay. I am redeemed.


Whew. Anyway. Yes. Totally makes sense. Okay. So you’re going to be unforgettable the closer you stay to what I’m hearing you say, the core, the center of that. Scattergram like the primary message. So powerful. Super awesome. All right. So step number one is like, we’re still at step. Number one, you guys, this is our goal.


The information that Heather has given you here. So nailing that message in deciding what we’re talking about. So the second step in that is obviously an extension of that. The second step you say is creating the actual signature talk itself. Sure. A little bit about how to go about doing that. Yeah. So for those of you who like cooking, I love cooking.


Imagine step one is like your amazing applause where you get all your ingredients out and you know what you’re going to make. Step two was actually following the recipe to build your delicious food, whatever you’re making your meal. So your signature talk, you’re not coming up with random things on the fly. It’s strategic because you’ve already done that homework. So your signature talk needs to guide your audience from where they are to where you want them to go,


which doesn’t have to be like a hub, but a tricky to buy my program. You need to guide them in their thinking and equip them with the tools to be successful on whatever the transformation they want. Your program just helps them do it faster. So your signature talk, it has to include stories. You have to be speaking to people’s beliefs. You have to be hitting that really good balance around insights and awareness and speaking to where they are.


But gone are the days where you can just talk about the why fluffy stuff for your whole talk. People hate that they know when they’re being sold or when somebody is bringing fluff. So people in today’s market, what tangible tips and strategies. So you have to balance your talk with both. How do you provide insights and teach people how to think differently about your topic?


You can’t skip over that because if you do, when they go back in their business and try to apply it and something’s off, you, haven’t equipped them with the right context for them to be successful, to be able to maneuver it in the context of their business, you have to teach them how to think. And then you have to give them some tips and strategies.


How I recommend people do that is you teach the why, and then you teach the what, and it’s gonna get a little technical, but I feel like your audience might love it. My format that I follow with people is you go, why, what, how easy model for a presentation? And you sandwich it with an opening story and a closing story.


Like not rocket science. It’s what I work with. Every client on opening story, closing story in the middle of the sandwich is the what, why and how, and if you’ve worked with April and you’ve been around her world, the what section is essentially your method. So you’re almost there. You just need to work on, okay, how do I get this messaging in?


And what’s the right place to talk about it in the how to make people hungry for more. But your signature talk should be like an accordion where you can deliver your signature talk in five minutes because you know your talking points, but you also can expand it and make it, I mean, a full day workshop, maybe even a full course, right?


So you should be able to know what your talking points are within your signature talk. And that becomes your business card on those guest stages. And it perfectly segues into purchasing your signature program. And I mean, this is just absolutely the journey that you take people on it and how you nail and get it and get people really understanding what you do and your zone of genius.


Couple of questions for you about the stories do you find? And maybe there isn’t a right or wrong answer, but I’m just asking the questions. I think that possibly your audience is hearing. We should totally do a clubhouse room on this, like in conjunction with the week we dropped this, we should, we should do a clubhouse room and take Q and a I’m here for it.


And that would be so much fun. So talking about really quickly about the stories, are they usually a story about another client, personal stories about how the expert themselves or the leader has overcome? Like what type of stories? I mean, are we making people cry? Does it depend on the context when we’re talking about stories in general, is there a quicker,


seriously? You guys follow us on clubhouse because Heather and I are going to do this. I’m just putting her on the spot right now. We’re going to house the clubhouse room on this. So just join our clubhouse room and you can ask your story. Questions, go to our Instagram. Bio is go to Heather’s Instagram bio. I’ll give you a little to give you a little teaser.


The secret to good storytelling is knowing what emotion you want people to feel. That’s the key thing. You have to be intentional with the emotions you want to evoke. So for example, when I was working with Tyler McCall last month, we wanted people to feel heart, but we also wanted to laugh. So we talked, we did a story about the time he went to forestry camp and was too embarrassed to tell his father that he had to take a dump.


So he had to go home. So like outside of the content, very weird left story about like 11 year old Tyler, that was one. But like, you have to catch people off guard, but you have to know what emotions are you going for? And obviously your stories have to have a point. There was a business lesson in that story.


I promise you. Yes. I’m sure there was, yes, we’re too. Like on the nose with our stories where like, I hate this people’s signature story where they’re like, let me tell you about my perfectly curated journey, which pumped me out of this perfect place to be your expert. No, I think it’s bullshit. Your audience is not in the exact same space that you were.


You can’t say I was in your shoes because I think it’s obnoxious and rude because you don’t know what their shoes are. I think we have to tell our journey stories differently in a more authentic way. If we want to attract the kind of clients we want. That’s if you want to have, I think, authentic, ethical, meaningful relationships that make impact,


you have to tell stories differently than what we’ve been told with the bro marketing online. Ah, here’s here’s my class name. There you go. Nice. Yes. Yes. Okay. Awesome. All right. Step. And we are going to do a clubhouse to room on this. So let me just say you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash two 11,


which is this episode number. And we will make sure there is a link to how you can get into this club has room and has asked Heather your questions. Also follow us both on Instagram because we’ll post our events on our Instagram accounts to Heather. What’s your IgE handle at the Heather Sager at B Heather Sager. Awesome. Okay. So step number three,


we’ve nailed the signature talk. We are on a roll. What happens next? What’s the next most important thing? Okay. So I think as entrepreneurs, we get by a lot by writing things out and typing things in our Google docs to post on our blogs or whatever else. But if you want to speak, you actually have to speak. Which means the first time that you speak your signature talk out loud should not be on a stage.


It should be in the privacy of your home office, where you can sound like a blubbering idiot because you will. So, so step number three is becoming magnetic with our delivery skills. So you have to learn how to speak in a way that’s captivating and entertaining that serves your audience gone are the days where you can just show up and shoot a video on something good on a,


how to people’s attention spans are short. Even our live events are like on clubhouse. People can jump in and out of rooms quickly. So you have to understand that your delivery skills, it’s not just the words you say, how you say it matters more. So you have to think about, am I speaking in just audio right now? Or am I also,


do I have video when it comes to communication? There’s three parts. The words that you say, how you say those words and your non-verbals. And I think people put a disproportionate weight on those. What it works out to studies that came from Southern California universities in the seventies, show that in marketing, when we’re talking about things that have an emotional message,


which most of our marketing messaging does, 55% of what we communicate is our non-verbals. So our facial expressions, our gestures now posture over half of what we communicate, which is why video is so powerful in allowing us to see, Oh, she’s authentic. Or she’s not like video is powerful because you see those. But 38% of what we communicate is the,


how we say it. The, the pace, the volume, the emphasis, those kinds of things. It’s 38% leaving. Only 70% of our communication to our words. Now, as online entrepreneurs, we’re used to writing, we’re used to emails. We’re used to captions. We’re used to putting all the weight there. So it’s scary to think, Oh crap,


I have to focus on these others, but I see it as a gift. You don’t have to be so precious with your words when you’re speaking. In fact, I screw up all the time. If you rewind this back, I have misspoken. I have I’ve strung words together to didn’t actually make a sentence. I speak like war all the time,


wrong words, whatever. You just keep moving because your energy, how you deliver it in your body, language carries you and your message. So if you don’t get intentional with how do you want to be received? What kind of energy do you want to create for other people? What do you want them to feel when they hear you? See you listened to you.


If you don’t practice that, you’re leaving it to chance. And I don’t know about you, but I don’t, I don’t want to leave to chance what people say about me. Like, I want to be intentional and be like, damn, I want to work with Heather or, Oh, you can get speaking coach. That’s going to help you bring your energy up,


work with that. Like, I want to be more intentional. I don’t want to like be caught up and obsessed with what people say about me, but I know I can influence it. So I say, why not? Yeah. That’s amazing. Those stats are very interesting. I had not personally heard those before, so super, super surprising. And then step number four.


Okay. So how do we, how do we go about wrapping all this up together in this is your speak for authority method. This is your unique IP, your methodology. You have gotten people Results going through this process going through these steps time and time again. So wrapping this up, what’s that last really important thing that people need to do? Yeah.


So building your authority means you need to make sure that your speaking strategy fits your strategy. That you’ve outlined. So if you determined that speaking is going to grow your authority, you have to say, okay, what podcast stages do I need to be on? Which live events do I need to be on? Who would I need to partner? How do you identify the right player in your industry to help position you in that way?


If your strategy was to grow your leads, all right, in this stage, we’re going to make sure the freebie that you offer on stages correlates with your signature talk. So it’s not just a, one-off like, Oh, go take my random free training about something. That’s not what I’m talking about. You’re not going to drive that. So that’s what we’re going to talk about.


How do we get results from our speaking determined by the strategy that you identified as your number one, so making money, but that’s negotiating a higher fee. Great. If that’s selling your program, great. If that’s driving leads great, like it’s kind of a pick your own pathway there. You haven’t figured out what strategy you want for you. And then we have the template to say,


okay, how do I make that happen from a stage? Fantastic. How powerful is this? You guys? All right, let me make sure that I can summarize your four steps as clearly as possible, because there was so much gold throughout this process. So your speak for authority method that you just laid out like a red carpet here. I mean,


this is gold. You guys, you would have had to pay Heather a lot of money to get this information. And so make sure that connecting with her more, both on clubhouse, and we’re going to give you some ways to work with Heather after this. So the first part of your method is really nailing your message. The second part is really creating that signature talk.


The third is delivering it with confidence in the fourth. Part of your method is elevating your authority. Did I summarize that correctly? You did great. You did great high fives and applause for your articulation. Okay. Students, good students. You guys should see my, see my notes behind the scenes. I’ll just share personally, you know, public speaking has just always been something that I love to do.


And once I get up there and once I get on a roll, I’m great, but it is such a head trip for me to get up there in the beginning of it. And my biggest fear, I tried to figure out what I was afraid of. Cause clearly I talk all the time. I’m not afraid to speak, right? And I really don’t care what people think about what I look like.


I’m one of the few speakers that usually takes a stage in some sort of flip-flops. But what I realized I was afraid of is that people were going to leave that room. And this was when we were having, you know, regular events that people are going to leave that room unchanged. And I realized that, wow, what if somebody says that was a biggest waste of an hour?


I ever spent it scared the shit out of me seriously, forever, because I was like, gosh, I just want people to leave here and have some sort of a transformation. And I was taking that. I’m really an advocate for that. As you know, like that’s how we develop programs, your programs should deliver a transformational measurable result. And I wasn’t really sure that my signature talk was doing that.


And so if you guys are listening and you have whatever issues, like Heather said it at the beginning, people would rather wet, like die than speak on stage. What is that saying in the beginning? Yeah, it’s a good Jerry Seinfeld joke around more people would rather give eulogy or a B in the coffin than give their own eulogy. Right? That is awful.


We were all given a voice for a reason. We’re all called to do great things for a reason. And using what Heather told you guys today in this show and her method is going to help you get clarity on all of this. And I’m super excited and appreciate your expertise and your time here today on the Sweetlife podcast. So we’re going to do a couple things to wrap up this episode.


First of all, Heather has a way to get you started. Obviously we want to give you tools to take action right now. So Heather, where do people go to learn more about working with you directly? Yeah. So the speak for authority method we talked about today, I outlined this in a little bit more detail and at a little slower pace,


if you want to head over my free training is up right now. If you head over to Heather singer.com forward slash free, you can download that free training. You can watch it right away and go through it. And I teach you how to actually use this method to start driving leads into your program. So you can grab that. Now it’s really designed for coaches course creators and small business owners who do not have a large following,


but want to start establishing their self as authority. So that’s perfect for you, but also if today’s conversation was of interest and you’re trying to out what kind of stages would even work for me? Like how does this even play out? I think maybe we should go on a second date. So maybe let’s jump into a training. Let’s go on a second date.


So I have a podcast it’s also on that page. Heather sager.com post free. You’ll have two options. The podcast is the Heather Sager show and you get like a little Besta playlist that you can hear a little bit more around how I speak. You can get used to my style a bit, steal it, use it for your own and start getting more comfortable with this concept of what does it look like to speak on other people’s stages,


but also use daily opportunities to exercise your voice, build your confidence. And most importantly, be more intentional with your message that you want to share so you can make a bigger impact. I love it. Okay. So I’m looking at my phone here. If you guys are watching the video behind the scenes, looking at the schedule, this show is live on January 25th.


It is episode number 211. So that means sometime this week, you and I are going to host a clubhouse room and we are going to implement and talk to our audience and answer questions for people that are listening to this show. So I’m so excited to, we’ve been talking about like, you know, doing rooms together. So here is how you find out when this room is happening.


First of all, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash clubhouse, and you’ll get a list of events and the direct link to the event so that you guys won’t miss it. Cause clubhouse is a lot of fun things happening. If you are not on clubhouse, then listen to my podcast that I recorded episode number 209, about how to get started on clubhouse.


And I just want you guys just to take a second here like me. I do have many notes. If you feel like you are struggling to be seen as a leader in your space, that you really want to connect with people on a more personal relational level relationships sell. That’s what sells and you want to get in front of your ideal audience and give them an experience,


transform them through your speaking so that they can work with you more. I highly recommend speaking in general, but specifically hitting up Heather to see how you can do that more confidently. So Heather, thank you so much for being on this show so much gold. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast.com/two one one. So episode number 211, we’ll have all the links that Heather mentioned cause we dropped a lot of gems in this.


So all the links, so you can find Heather and work with her more. And of course, a link to our clubhouse room when we get that scheduled<inaudible> Hey guys, thanks for tuning into the show to get updates and join Heather live in our clubhouse room, please visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And follow me on clubhouse at April beach. If you would like to have Heather’s buys on your business and ask Heather your questions and also to our weekly clubhouse rooms,


every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Thanks so much for tuning into us and I will talk to you next week.

Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz


Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.


And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,


or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.


We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,


videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.


And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,


there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,


you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,


but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,


and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.


And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,


and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,


your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.


Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.


Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,


there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.


I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,


which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.


Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,


we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.


And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.


So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.


So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.


You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.


So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?


It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,


but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,


but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.


Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,


right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.


The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,


they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?


Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,


people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.


How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?


So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,


and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.


But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.


If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.


And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,


20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?


So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,


is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,


whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,


Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.


And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,


okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,


why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.


You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?


So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,


to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.


And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,


though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.


And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,


wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.


Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,


a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,


that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,


and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.


Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.


So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,


people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.


So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.


So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.


And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?


Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.


Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?


How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.


Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.


So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.


I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?


Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,


you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,


awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,


I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.


And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,


right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,


is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.


And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.


And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.


It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,


you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.


I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,


then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,


and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.


Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.


I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.


I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,


Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.


You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz


To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,


wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.


We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.


And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,


it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.


We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,


a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.


It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.


Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.


He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.


This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,


and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.


And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.


Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.


And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,


few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.


And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,


we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.


I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.


That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,


you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,


you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,


you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?


And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.


But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.


So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,


and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.


You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,


and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,


right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.


This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,


if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,


but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.


Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,


what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,


and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.


He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,


maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.


Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.


That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.


It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.


And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,


for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.


So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,


we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.


Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,


well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.


Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,


because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,


plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,


Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,


I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,


it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.


So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,


very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.


Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,


which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.


Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,


that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,


right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.


At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.


And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,


I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.


And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,


you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,


I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.


So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,


who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,


it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.


And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,


there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.


So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,


well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,


no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.


Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.


It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.


And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,


Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,


for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,


I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.


And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.


And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,


the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?


And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,


let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.


You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.


Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,


when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.


And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.


And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.


Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.


I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,


but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,


like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,


I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,


but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.


And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com


simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.


It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.


Bye bye. For now

Episode 205: How To Scale With Systems and Grow Your Team – with Ravi Abuvala

Ruvi Abuvala SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Access Ravi Abuvala’s Free Course: The Exact Steps We Took To Scale 2 Companies To 7-Figures In 18 Months!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and small businesses who want to scale by hiring Virtual Assistants but you don’t have the time to look for staff, the expertise to find the best help internationally or the systems in place to onboard your team to scale faster. 
This show is ideal for entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of my “Start To Scale Up System” – Take the quiz to learn your current business status


It’s time to grow your business and you need help. But how do you find the right team members when you don’t have time (or knowledge) to onboard them? In this show, we’ve covering how to hire international help, how to onboard them correctly, and how to do this by using an outside agency. Ruvi Abuvala, founder of scalingwithsystem.com is on the show dishing the powerful secrets his company uses to help other businesses grow and scale with team, systems and “The Ramping Bible”, and how to leverage these in your business right away. 
We’re answering these questions about Hiring/Working With Virtual Assistants
  • When is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant?
  • Should everyone hire one? When would you not want to?
  • Where do you hire your virtual assistants from? What are the pros and cons of those areas?
  • How do you know what to take off your plate (delegate) first?
  • How do you make sure there is strong communication and reliability?
  • Should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task?

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Understand the exponential scaleability of teams
  2. Be aware of the need for (or update of) onboarding systems 
  3. Know which onboarding systems to create first
  4. Have all the answers to the questions posed above

Resources Mentioned:

For help building offers, courses or programs that Scale visit www.signatureoffer.com

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, your host, and I’m super glad That you’re here today is a heavy heading show. And you’re going to get a lot of powerful,


valuable information. I can’t wait to introduce you to our guest, but if you’re a new listener here to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, I just wanted to say, hello. I’m April beach, the host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company. And we help experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses scale online, develop your signature offers and become the undisputed leader in your space by providing business consulting and services to service-based entrepreneurs and companies looking to grow and scale with online services,


programs, and digital products in everything that we do here on the show. This is our outreach. This is where we deliver proven business trainings from decades of business coaching that you would pay thousands of dollars to get this business strategy. We deliver to you here on the show, totally free. So thank you so much for tuning in, and I can’t wait to dive into today’s show today.


We’re talking about how to scale with systems and grow your team. This is episode number 205, which means all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life co.com click on podcast and episode two Oh five on today’s show. We’re specifically talking to those of you guys who want to scale your business by hiring virtual assistants, but you don’t have the time to look for the staff yourself.


You might not have the expertise in the areas you’re looking to hire. And so it’s hard for you to sort actually who’s the right candidate because you yourself may not know or be a master in a certain area, and you need systems in place to scale your business faster. This show is ideal for those of you guys who are in phases, two, three or four of my start to scale up system.


If you aren’t sure your current business status, cruise over to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz, you can just pause this episode for a second and you can just answer six questions. You’ll get your exact business status and a checklist of things you should be focusing on to grow and scale your company faster. So it’s time to grow your business and you need help,


but you need to find the right team members. Today’s cast is absolutely insane. You’re going to love this guy in the very best way. He is the founder of scaling with systems. And on this show, we are dishing out powerful secrets that he uses in his company to scale his business faster. And these are the questions that you are going to know the answers to at the end of this episode,


when is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant? Should everybody hire a VA when you not want to hire a VA, where do you hire your virtual assistants from what are the pros and cons of those areas? So US-based versus internationally. How do you know what to take off your plate and delegate first? So at the end of this show,


you are going to have a list of the most common roles first fulfilled by virtual assistants, by companies looking to scale, how do you make sure there is a strong communication and reliability when you hire out internationally and should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task? Today’s guest expert is rubby of Evolla. And he’s the founder of scale with systems and business accelerator that works to bootstrap and scale their client’s businesses leveraging paid advertising sales funnels,


and fully trained overseas VAs, which is the area we’re focusing on today. And the past 14 months, not 14 years in the past 14 months, he has scaled to seven figure businesses with less than a thousand dollars of his own capital in four commission-based employees. Today, he’s worked with over 500 firms around the world and place 300, excuse me, 630 virtual assistants.


And he’s spoken on some of the largest stages into the industry, including being featured by Fox news, Forbes and entrepreneur. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episode. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number two, zero five<inaudible> Are you guys well, I am joined by Ravi ABA Vala here on the show because it’s time for us to talk about how to scale your business with teams.


And this is not something that comes naturally to most entrepreneurial leaders. You know, we’re really good at our area of genius. You know, our zone of genius, what we do the ways in which we give people Results, but when it comes to scaling, there’s a couple of bottlenecks. One is usually business model and the second one is growing teams.


And this is something that I have really struggled with as a leader of both of my own companies as well. And it’s not something that comes naturally to me. And so I was super stoked that Ravi wanted to be on this show. And today we’re diving into really how to scale your business, not only by initially growing teams, but growing teams and then sub teams,


and really how to scale the actual teams themselves. Some things that I don’t think we talk about enough as entrepreneurs and experts as leaders. So Robbie, thank you so much and welcome to the show April. Thanks so much for having me here. I am super excited, listen to the podcast for a little bit as well. And I know that majority of it is just pure value.


So that is exactly what I aim to give everybody that’s listening to this today. So thank you guys for your time and you as well, April. So thanks for having me here. Yeah, I’m super stoked. Okay. So today we’re Going to dive into a couple of different areas. First of all, remote teams, internationally based remote teams. We’re going to talk about,


we’re also going to talk about your expert process of growing remote teams, how you onboard people, and then we’re going to dive into how to scale your teams within your teams. So I think one of the first questions that we need to tackle for our listeners here is just breezing by this, because they’ll have all your resources and where to find this more,


but just as a foundation, you know, how do people really find expert remote, highly qualified individuals, really outside of the U S to work for them? Yeah, that’s an awesome question. And it’s one that we obviously hear all the time, and I think with anything in life, you have two kind of ways of doing it. It’s like,


you’re going to roll up your sleeves. You’re going to figure it out. You’re going to do it yourself, which is awesome. Especially if you’re just starting and you have like the training and everything to go along with it. And you want to take them from just like an anybody to the expert of their fields. That’s one way to do it. And the other way to do it as essentially,


you know, working with some kind of third-party company or working with a recruiter, to finding somebody who already has a lot of the skills and qualifications of the tasks that you’re looking to get completed, and then pretty much transplanting them into your team at that point. And then you’re pretty much only selling them on your culture and your vision. So you have two different avenues.


You can kind of go down. I see people going through both. We do both, depending on what we’re going, if it’s like a hyper specialized expert in a certain field that like, I don’t even know how to deliver that result. Like, as you grow in scale, if you’re listening to this, everyone’s like go only delegate to people. What,


you know how to do it. Well, then you’re locked in this like sphere of like knowledge. And instead you’re gonna get to the point where it’s like, I don’t know how to do this, but I want to do this. And so, you know, I need to hire someone that already knows it. So there’s that aspect of him, which is a little scary,


but it was almost like, we’ll talk about later, you communicate KPIs. I think it’s okay. And then like on the other side is like, Hey, I already know how to do this. So maybe I don’t have to go find somebody else that knows how to do this. I can just teach this person to myself, but then you kind of create those systems and that ramping Bible that I’m sure we’ll talk about here in a little bit,


that helps them kind of grow along that process. Okay. So this is a really good opportunity. I want people to know, how did you get into this? Like you didn’t, you didn’t start this, did you say I’m going to be a scale expert and help people build teams? So share a little bit of your background in, in why this is now your Ninja skill.


Yeah, so I keep it really short because I want to stay on the value. But very long story short was going to go to law school, graduated college. My dad was diagnosed with stage four lung cancer. I had to go take care of him. Instead of law school, I finally got into law school, decided it wasn’t for me. I dropped out sort of my first company prospect social was an advertising agency and knew nothing about systems.


You don’t think about process. Like I was just like, I’m going to come at this just with pure hard work, like pure grinding hustle mode. And for the first eight months I gained about 50 pounds. I was like losing hair. I was getting gray hairs and I made $3,000. The first six, eight months of business, $3,000 as a screenshot on my website.


You can see it. And I almost thought that I made the wrong decision. Then I hired my first coach or consultants. I went to a mastermind. I hired my first coaching consultant. He showed me really the powers of virtual assistants, the powers of systems, the power of sales funnels. I know a lot of the stuff that you guys cover as well.


I implemented that stuff. Next month, we did $30,000. Within six months, we had done a hundred thousand dollars in one month and now that’s a multi seven figure business. And just from that moment that I hit the map by having that first month to a, you know, a few months later when people started seeing me living abroad and traveling the world,


I just had a bunch of people reaching out to me. How did you do this? You know, we were in the same Facebook group and at the same level and all of a sudden you’re shot up here. And so I just pretty much was like, yeah, that’s pretty much just like the sales funnels and these virtual assistants. And here’s how you do it.


And long story short, you know, I think a lot of great businesses if you know, like Slack or a few others, like it’s never really, the intention for that main business was ever to start it, but you just have people like banging on your door. Like, you know, you’re trying to sell one thing and they’re like, I want this other thing.


And so that was kind of the Genesis of scaling with systems. Yeah. I love it. I love it. And we’ll make sure there’s a link to your company and how to work with you as well to do this. So we have these first hires and it is, it’s such a big problem for business owners. You know, we have these first hires,


but they’re on board, but let’s talk about actually how to interview them. You have a really special onboarding process this too. I know from talking to so many companies and I personally know within my own business that developing the onboarding process is a ton of work to do it right in. Sometimes, you know, you really fail in a way that you’re not going to get the end result for that new person.


So talk to us about your it’s. You call it the ramping Bible and really how to do this, how to bring people, team members on board. Yeah. It’s super interesting. It’s like, you know, anytime you just sit down and I know you work with a lot of like people that are creating their intellectual property on coursework or whatever it is.


And so, you know, I don’t know about anybody else, but when I’m doing it, it’s like, I’m not getting paid for that necessarily yet. And so it’s really hard to like, take that time, carve it out and do it. It’s it’s just like, there’s like leverage data and you’re like, I’m going to get paid later for this.


But right now this is really difficult. And the onboarding process is something super similar. And so a lot of people, they don’t have any kind of onboarding process. They don’t have any kind of training. And so instead what they’ll do is just hire someone and they’re like, okay, go do this thing. Or then they’re trying to spend all this time training them and that’ll work with their first hire and maybe for the hire after that.


But if you’re smart enough, you know how to, which I wasn’t smart enough with just so everyone here knows I had to learn the hard way, but now we help our clients avoid it. You can create this kind of onboarding training process. We call the ramping Bible inside of scaling, which systems is 35 pages long. It’s a Google document. And it literally starts out like we have one for our commission-based sales position literally starts out with just like,


Hey, this is why we’re hiring you. And this is the importance of this position. These are the KPIs. And then these are also the<inaudible>. These are the goals. If you do this, you’re going to make this money. If you do this, you’re going to make this. So there’s no like end of the year bonus, there’s no like,


you know, you’re going to get promoted at Rockefeller. And it’s just like, here’s how you will make more money and graduate in our company. And we lay it out from everything into Z. And then after that, I’m telling them because a lot of people mistake this and they don’t even have this systemized, but why should you work for scaling systems?


Why should you work for this company? Like, what’s the vision here? What’s the dream here? What are our past clients? Like you have to sell your employees on working with you. And if you don’t and they’re going to leave the first opportunity that they get. And so then we have a few pages on like who we are, what my bad,


that story. I just told you a second ago, like about my dad, the lung cancer, the drop out of school. And then we get into kind of the hard skill stuff, which is like, Hey, here’s how you send cold emails. Usually you scrape leads. Here’s how you send LinkedIn messages. Here’s how you do demo calls. There’s do qualifying calls.


I mean, it took me probably two months to get the whole thing together. But now, you know, between the 1800 virtual assistants that we’ve hired in the past two years, and then, you know, I personally have onboarded 35 different team members inside of our company. All I literally do is, and I’ll tell you guys a little hack, which we don’t have to get into,


but our salespeople pay us $1,500 to come work for our company and make us money because we give them a pretty much a done for you course almost. That’s like, here’s how you make money online. These are you doing. And we just have our service as a thing that they deliver for. And so we’re teaching them to be like top 1% salespeople,


you know, top 1% lead generators. And so some of my sales guys, I have a guy in Canada he’s 17 years old and making like close to $10,000 a month at 17 years old selling our stuff. And so if you can have something that comprehensive from a to Z, then you can get a 17 year old in Canada to sell for you.


You can get someone in the Philippines to do ads for you or client fulfillment or whatever, the backend stuff for us, but it kind of all lays on and falls on that foundational ramping Bible or whatever you want to call it. That someone gets whenever they join your company. Okay, that’s genius. I’m sold. I want your ramping Bible. And I want my own ramping Bible for the Sweetlife company.


Absolutely. You know, I thought our brand introduction onboarding process was cool. Well, definitely no where doesn’t even hold a candle to this. So if you guys are listening, clearly this is the gold standard. This is what needs to be done that alone. We could end this podcast episode on, well, you could just do that. You’re going to scale exponentially just by doing that,


this ramping Bible, you have it for your own company and your own systems, but then do you also help other companies develop their own ramping Bible based on what you have established there? Let’s talk about that a little bit. Yeah. A hundred percent. So like if I was to just get people, the Randy Bible straight as we haven’t and probably overwhelmed a lot of people,


right? Unless they like have multiple team members already and they have people to work on and consume the content. It’s like people would lose their minds. So instead we’re kind of build pieces of the ramping Bible together. So they get to see ours, they get understand what is involved in ours. We help them build it. But instead of being like,


Hey, do this for every position in your company, usually cause we place these virtual assistants for our, we start there and we’re like, okay, this is what they need to be trained on. And we actually train them for our clients. So we do, they do a 60 day bootcamp and we do all the work for them. So they’re kind of getting the done for you,


virtual assistant, but then it’s like, Hey, you know, what do you need to, we teach them how to great, obviously SOP standard operating procedures. So, you know, what do you need to reference back to what happens if you make another hire, right? What happens this virtual assistant leaves, whatever it is. And so we help them build this ramping Bible with them.


And we usually start in the lead generation side because that is an, our experience where a lot of people are lacking in their business is just like, you don’t have enough appointments or people in their calendar. And then once we get past that, then we can start talking about ramping Bibles for sales or ramping Bibles for our account management or ramping Bibles for chief operating officers or any one of those other positions.


Yeah. So we kind of help our clients create that after they joined scaling with systems and then we’ll give them the virtual assistant, who’s going to go through it already, fully trained. Right. Oh my gosh. What an amazing outline, what amazing program you guys have. Okay. So this brings us to the next area that I really want to talk about.


So the majority of the listeners to this show are established small businesses, but if you really, they call us micro businesses. You know, if you look at a small business, it’s still, you know, a hundred people. So we’re talking, you know, businesses that have anywhere from eight to 20 team members or businesses that are listening to this show that might only have three team members right now,


but they need to get to 12 in order to fulfill all the roles within their company. This brings in so many other growing pains as far as from a management and scaling standpoint. So talk to us about your expertise, what you can pour into our listeners when it’s time to actually scale the team itself. What are the primary roles? We talked about a little bit behind the scenes before recording,


but what are the primary jobs that most companies seem to fill first when they’re starting to delegate and grow their team? And how do you recommend companies go about managing that scaling process within the team itself? Yeah. So there’s a great concept called a scorecard. I didn’t create it myself. It was from the gentleman who created HubSpot. They wrote a great book called inbound marketing,


and they’re talking about the scorecard inside of there. And the idea of it is like, you know, every day as a CEO, other team members should be reporting on their scorecard to you the 10, 12, 15 most important statistics in that company. So, you know, number of leads generated number of appointments, you know, number of cash collected yesterday.


You compare that to last week, whatever it is. So the first thing you have to do before you even talked about scaling a team and making the hires is like, are you systemized? And then once, you know, you’re systemized, if someone was going to take this role, what is the expected KPIs? Where’s this expected goals I would want them to do.


And a lot of people’s like, I don’t know, but let’s just say, have you focused solely on email? And you knew that you could send out 300 emails a day and you could probably get five people. That’d be interested in what you’re doing. Then, you know, that’s while you’re still trying to juggle 15 other things at the same time.


So if you hire one person to do this, full-time they could probably get eight to 10 leads day. That’s a, probably an average or a conservative number to use. And so then you hire the person who said, Hey, I’m expecting eight to 10 positive responses, leads, booked appointments in my calendar. If you do this every single day, they say,


yes, you go great. Then what you’ll do is you’ll try a bunch of things out, LinkedIn, email, Facebook, Instagram, or whatever kind of department that you’re in. Obviously whatever’s relevant to that. And then you’ll see what’s working and you’ll see what’s not working. And a lot of times it’s like one thing is blaring obvious that it’s working.


And a lot of other things aren’t. And the biggest mistake, I see people doing whatever their scaling teams is. They keep everyone focused on this like kind of general level where like, everyone’s just doing everything instead of being like, okay, majority of our booked appointments are coming from email, but I keep on trying to do Facebook messages or LinkedIn messages or whatever it is instead of okay,


email works. I’m gonna put you full time on email and they’re going to hire another person to do full-time on email as well, but that’s doubling our efforts. So the first thing that I’ll usually say is like, you figure out what’s working through your KPIs and your scorecard. And then you can double down on that as long as it’s something that you want to double down on such as sales or lead generation,


right? The typical flow that I see people doing in a business, especially higher ticket service based businesses, which is kind of what our wheelhouse is, is virtual assistants for lead generation is mostly the number one thing that you do then what’ll happen is pretty soon you’ll get so many leads that you literally can’t do. The sales calls. You’re like, you know,


dizzy from doing eight to 10 sales calls every single day. So the second hire that we used see is sales. And at this point you have kind of the front end of your business taken care of. You’re waking up, you’re out, you’re having the BA generate leads, a sales person closed deals. And now you have the back end you’ve got to work on.


And I know you work with a lot of hyper scalable or you help people become hyper scalable through like courses or kind of intellectual property. Exactly. So then we start working on that. How do we kind of make your offer a little more hyper scalable? So before we even hire somebody, you know, you don’t want to hire someone in to do something that’s inefficient because then you’re just spending money to do something that’s inefficient.


So how can we streamline your backend process a little bit more, your offering your coursework, whatever it is, working with one niche. And then you’ll usually hire a virtual assistant of a bill for you or some other specialized person. Then it’s an account manager to handle everything that’s going on. And at this point you’re pretty much just operations, right? You got someone generating leads,


you’ve got someone closing leads, you’ve got someone onboarding clients, you got someone delivering for you. And that’s honestly all really low cost because you’re using virtual assistants and commission only salespeople. And then you kind of have room to do the next hire, which is a little more higher level, but just like chief operating officer, essentially, this is the person that is now managing all these people.


And they’re the ones that look at the KPIs and everything else. And now you’re pretty much free to do what, like I’m doing. A lot of my other clients are doing which like podcasts and play with ads and do content and grow a YouTube channel and work on your products onto the backend stuff, which is a dream state for me personally, I had to make sure that the whole company is growing and scaling month over month.


Right. And, and you’re the only one that can do those things. Nobody else can do those, but you, you know, it’s your genius. And I, and I absolutely love that. And so what we’ve done is a company is, you know, we grow really, we have grown from the top down and I say this the time on this podcast.


So my listeners know that I really suck at management. I don’t mean to be, I’m really nice, but I’m just not a great person to work for because I’m super entrepreneur creator, not, you know, not a great systems person, but then Kevin’s, I have those systems people to do that. But you know, we’ve really grown it from that CEO position that,


you know, CMO position and then down. But I love this idea. Granted, we started growing 16 years ago, but I love this idea about really filling this in. So are companies that come to us and the people that listen to the show, I mean, everybody knows the power of scaling. They just don’t know how to go about it.


And there’s budget different ways. We’ve talked about scaling, you know, scaling your offers, you know, to figuring out your systems, how your, your business model, which is all the stuff that I geek out on this scaling through teams is absolutely seems the first foremost, everything you should be thinking about those you guys who are listening, whether you’re just getting started or you’re just at that tipping point where it’s time to scale.


For sure. I want you to process what re what Ravi is saying here, because it’s incredibly important and I totally see this. Okay. So let me ask you some questions here. As I’m getting through to kind of thinking about some questions that our listeners would be asking. So we talked about finding the right people and whether you outsource or, you know,


you’re, you’re kind of going through the process of finding them on your own finding the right people is, is a big, heavy lifting job. And so that is something that your company takes care of. And we’ll make sure that our listeners know how to find you this ramping Bible, again, huge project, huge project. And so based on where our listeners are in this love the value of taking your expertise in your template and creating their own from that.


And one of the things you said that was really important that I just want to hit on is having our team members find themselves in our mission is a big thing. I know for me personally, we just got back from our 20, 21 planning retreat in Florida. We were in Florida last week. And one of the biggest things for each one of my team members has been like,


okay, what is your vision? And how can you find your vision within my company? You know, how is this great for you in addition to being really awesome for me too. And so I love it. That’s something that you guys hit on and there, do you feel like we can do that as well with international teams as we can growing US-based teams?


And how do you create that culture within your team? I did not tee you up for this. You did not know I was going to ask this, but how do we create that sort of team culture when your team is spread out all over? So I’m super happy you asked it. And, and it’s funny, cause like culture is kind of like one of those little buzz words that people just say,


you know, on an Instagram video or whatever it is. But if you have a team, you understand that like culture is the difference. If like when COVID happens and you’re a business campaign payroll that they’re still working, right? Like that’s a difference in culture. And obviously, luckily we didn’t have that problem because we’re online. But like my brother had that issue cause he had restaurants.


And so culture is a difference in like, you know, you not being able to make salary next month, culture difference. And like you having to ask someone to work later when it’s, you know, it’s supposed to be their night out with their girlfriend, whatever it is. And they are like, no problem, I totally get it. And like finding those people,


it’s a great book, good to great. By Jim Collins, he talks about, you know, getting them on the bus and it’s like finding those people is super, super important. And to do that, you have to develop the right culture and that really starts with, and I’ll be really honest. I will listen. I was really great at this in the beginning.


Then we went from six employees to 36 in a matter of three months. And like, I really lost myself and I lost that kind of culture. Like the address was delegating. Like you didn’t do the culture, you do the culture, whatever it is. And what I’ll tell everyone here is why I brought it back from me and what it was in the beginning was like every 90 days we have performance reviews with our employees and I delegated those out for a little bit time.


Cause I was just so busy, but we care about personal financial and professional goals. So we would say, Hey, you know, what’s been going great the past 90 days, what do we need to work on? You know, this is both of us, everyone get the feedback. They can knock the CEO. They want to, I think it says,


awesome. Let’s talk about goals here. So in the next 90 days, and then even further and beyond what are your professional personal and financial goals. And so some of our team members it’s, I want to lose weight. So when I go back home from Thanksgiving or I go home for Christmas, you know, I look better or maybe it’s like,


I want to be able to buy a house, but my credit is for whatever it is and what you’ll realize. A lot of times it doesn’t have to do with money. Like these are not money goals here just like access to certain things or knowledge or information. And so what you can do as a company is help them reach those goals. If they help you reach your goals.


So Hey, if you hit these numbers that we send this many outbound messages. If we get this many books appointments, then I will pay for a credit repair service. So you can start getting your application for your home, whatever it is. And I was doing that really well in the beginning. But then, like I said, I lost touch.


And recently, literally about a week ago, right in the middle of the move from California to Florida, I’m doing 36 performance reviews in three days. And I’m just like 12 a day, pretty much. I’m like, Oh my God, I’m going crazy. But in that timeframe, I actually was able to like finally go back down and touch every single person and just like hear how much our company has impacted them.


And then like what their future goals are and what, and at the end of every single call, they’re like Ravi, I can’t believe you took the time out of your day to do this call with. And I’m thinking in my head, like, I’m grateful for you. Like, please don’t leave me. Like you’re in the big part of this.


I’m not, this is nothing like you’ve done everything up to this point. And so I guess that’s the point of building that culture has to really do with like asking your employees what they want, including overseas virtual assistants. The ones that were the most honest with me were the ones in the Philippines. And they were telling me like, they want to have kids,


but it’s a little difficult for them to have kids because of like biological reasons. And so we’re talking about adoption and like all these other things that like the other people, you never would hear anybody in the us or someone else talk about what their employer for multiple reasons. But yeah, it sounds cheesy, but figuring it out, writing down what they want,


holding them accountable, I’ve been helping them reach it. If they help you reach your goals on your business, I think is a great way to keep a high performance culture inside of a company, but also have that kind of caring. Like I’ll take care of you. Don’t worry about it. Kind of thing. I love that. Oh my gosh,


love that. Appreciate all of that. And all of you sharing and the transparency and just really all about that. And I think that’s as important as everything else we talked about today. All right. So businesses are ready to scale and they need help. How can they find you? Yeah, of course, the easiest way. And then I had told you the beginning of this and I’m sure you can confirm it.


I talk very fast and I like breeze over topics that people are like, Ravi. I want to learn more about that. And so what I did is I put together a free course. It’s about five and a half hours of totally free content and overs, like where to find the virtual assistants, what kind of lead generation scripts you should be using,


you know, how to kind of build that ramping Bible yourself. And if you want to get access to it, you just go to scaling which isn’t dot com slash sweet dash life. And I know April set, you’ll link it down below, but she actually attaches to the podcast. So that way you guys can make it easier for you to remember,


but yeah, scaling with systems.com/sweet-life. And you guys get instant free access to that course. Yeah. Highly, highly recommend in your company, scaling with systems. We’ll make sure that we have links to where people can find you in addition to not only the course, but across social media as well. You thank you so much for your time. Thanks for talking fast.


Totally love it. We covered so much information and I know that our listeners got a ton of value out of this, especially those that are really at that place where it’s time to scale. They’re serious about it and they want to do it right. So really appreciate your time on this. Yeah, of course. April was an absolute pleasure. Thanks so much for having me on here.


Keep up the great work with all the incredible content and for everyone that’s at home or driving, whatever you’re doing, working out and listening, I do appreciate your guys’ time and I hope you got some value out of it, For sure they did. For sure. All right. Thanks Robbie.<inaudible> What a great show. I appreciate rubby so much for being on here.


And I like you when we have these guests in here, I’m taking notes like a crazy woman. If you’ve seen us behind the scenes or if you haven’t yet checked out our YouTube channel and you can actually see the full interview on video with me and Ruby and see me taking notes here through this process. Again, you can find the course, which is an amazing bonus.


We have, you know, no, no profit stake in this whatsoever. And Ravi doesn’t either. This is a completely free training that he’s given you simply by visiting scale with systems.com forward slash sweet dash life. And you can get access to this complete training that he has for you learn more about that onboarding Bible, the ramping up Bible, and how to create your own.


We are here to make sure you have systems in place to grow and scale your business online faster. And we appreciate you listening to the show. If you haven’t yet, please take a second and leave us a review on Apple or you listen to podcasts and connect with us and follow us at Sweetlife company on LinkedIn. Thanks so much. You guys I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 199: How To Love Your Business Financials To Create The Life You Want – Megan Dahle and April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Megan Dahle’s FREE 36-Page E-Book: Getting Your Money Right

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in all Phases of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to stop being scared of the money and start taking control.


You either love or hate to talk about money in your business. In fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when it comes to financial ledgers. But on today’s show, we’re gonna make you love the money and control it. Getting your money right in your business is the best feeling ever, and the first step to getting a company that’s going to scale, grow, and give you what you really want in business and life.
This week we’re diving in with guest expert, accountant and CFO Consultant, Megan Dahle, and talking about where you are now, understanding where you want to be, and making sure you’re on the right path to get there. We do this by teaching you the simple three numbers you need to know that will give you the power, confidence, and control you seek.


  1. Understand why you need to name your money
  2. Get clarity on the dangers of reinvesting every dime into your business
  3. Know the most important number that you really need to pay attention to
  4. Get a simple routine to look at your numbers without being scared

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back. This is sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 199. And yes, spoiler alert next week is our 200th podcast episode. And there’s some really cool stuff.

So make sure you’re subscribed. So you don’t miss out on that today. We are talking about how to love your business financials. So, first of all, if you clicked on this episode, then you’re pretty brave because the reality is that you either love to talk about money or you hate to talk about money in your business. And in fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when we’re talking about financial ledgers,

but on today’s show, we’re going to dive in to make you love your money and take control of it. Getting your money right in your business is seriously. One of the best feelings ever really start to pay yourself. You’re paying valuable team members. Nothing feels better than that, but then we need to take it a step further. Is your business actually going to give you the life that you want.

First, we have the business foundations and financials that need in place, but today we’re talking about your life. How do we have the company generate enough money? And what do we need to do to get your life, to look the way that you want it to? And today’s guest expert, Megan Dali is here to talk about all of that. So the reality is let’s face it.

You either don’t understand the money in your business, or you have zero control of your cashflow, or you’ve done a really great job getting your financial systems in place. And now you’re ready for the next level either way. This is a great episode for you to tune into entrepreneurs. Don’t inherently come wired as accountants, as a matter of fact, most entrepreneurs are creatives.

And so when it comes to these types of systems, you might run the other direction. So that’s why today’s a really important show. And these are the things we’re covering on today’s episode. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know why you need to name your money and what exactly that means. You are going to get clarity on why it might be dangerous to always reinvest your profit back into your business.

So raise your hand. If every time you make goes back into your company, raise your hand. If every time you make those back into your company, but you also pay yourself a little bit. We’re going to talk about why both of those are not good, even though everybody does it and how to start changing that pattern. So you can reach your long-term business goals and we’re diving into important things like the number one number that you should pay attention to.

And why Megan says you don’t have to know all the numbers. We’re not getting into financial accounting lingo here. You’re just going to walk away understanding the most important number that you should know and a simple routine to look at your numbers on a regular basis, to make sure that you are on the right track. And let me introduce you to Megan here,

she’s our guest expert today, and she’s a doll you’re going to love her 15 years in a Megan Dolly’s corporate accounting career. A business owner reached out to her Megan privately because she was worried that one of the partners was taking more of their fair share. After looking at the books, Megan discovered that the partner had in fact taken $400,000 out of the account without the other partner,

knowing it was this sensitive project that was a launching pad for Megan. She is now a consulting CFO who creates light bulb moments inside her client’s businesses. And she makes the numbers easy for you to understand more importantly, easy for you to use so that you can learn how to grow your business stronger and make sure you’re generating cash and that it’s producing long-term wealth benefits for you.

So let’s go ahead and tune into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes and the resources make it has here for us can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is podcast number 199. And if you haven’t yet, please take a second to leave us a review on Apple podcasts and share this episode with your friends, other business owners who really need to take control of their financial numbers as well.

Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> All right. You guys are welcome to the show. I am here with Megan Dolly, and today we’re talking about money. We always talk about goals and so many other podcasts talk about goal setting, but what are really comes down to is actually looking at the numbers, then the path that you’re on to make it happen.

And so that’s why I’m so excited to have Megan on the show today, because this is her area of expertise. And before she introduces herself, I wanted to read something to you that she sent to me, which is why I knew she absolutely had to be here on the show, talking to you guys today. She said light bulb moments are my favorite thing.

When my clients finally see what the numbers mean, it’s like watching. One of those videos were colored by blind people, put on those special glasses and can see color for the first time. It’s magical. Those magical moments have appeared in many parts of my life. And that’s how I know I’m on the path God has designed for me. Things that start by devastate is devastating.

Disaster is turned into something beautiful. And these transformations, these transformations that make me believe that all things are possible. And so Megan is absolutely an expert. She has crazy credentials, which I’ve already read for you, but what’s so important when we bring experts on the show is understanding the why behind what you do, not only what your Ninja zone of geniuses,

but the why behind. And so I wanted to share that with you guys before we, we dove into talking to Megan today. So Megan, take a minute and introduce yourself to our audience and tell people a little bit about you and how you got to be what you’re doing Today. Sure. Well, thanks so much April for letting me come on your show.

It’s amazing. I love how many shows you’ve done your consistency. The content is like, Oh my gosh, this is stuff I actually use. Like I’ve actually implemented stuff from your podcast. And so it was no brainer that I wanted to be on this show. So I’m a small town girl. I’m from Midwest, South Dakota. I like gardening. I have my kids.

I work with the marching band at the high school. I like to volunteer there. Yeah. And the numbers are my game. Numbers are my jam. I’ve just always seen them differently. Math always came easily. And my math teachers are like, your brain just works different. I love that. Yeah. You have to have a special gift to see numbers differently.

I do not have that gift nor to any of my children. So there you either have it or you don’t. I think. And, and so we’re grateful for people like you. So how do you work with clients? Primarily you have this amazing framework that you’ve created to help entrepreneurs and business owners make sure that they’re on the right path and that they’re going to achieve their goals.

I mean, this is a tangible framework and we’re going to dive into it today, which I’m so excited to on this show. Yeah. So the whole thing is that people are scared of their numbers or they don’t know what it means. They’re timid around them conversations with their bookkeeper and their accountant. Don’t go so well because they’re using that chart in the depreciation,

but you’ve been a, the, you know, those revenues Rose, it’s almost like they don’t want you to be asking questions, right? I’m going to use some jargon. So you just stop asking me questions. What I want to get to is what’s useful for you. I mean, you don’t need to know the ins and outs of your financial statements.

What’s actually useful. That’s going to help you make good decisions that you can have confidence in and know why you made those decisions and see the progress down the road. So it’s breaking it down into what would be a need. Right? Right. And your framework that you share, and you have a book about this, we’re going to, we’re going to let everybody know how to find you is number one,

where are you in identifying that number two is where do you want to go? Where do you want to be? And that’s the one we’re really diving in here today, which I’m super excited about. And then the third one is, Hey, you know, are you really on the right path to get there? So guide us into that second part of how,

how do you protect your goals? How do you identify, you know, really what is it going to take for me to get that beach house or send my kids to college or, you know, sell my company or whatever that is. How do you work with clients to understand that? Yeah. So it’s like the second half of goal making that is completely missing.

People don’t want to talk about the math part of the goals because it’s scary math or they forget about it or, or they’re more about it’ll come set the goal, set your vision board and it’ll come. I’m more about, well, let’s go get it. Let’s not wait for anything. Let’s not sit around and wait for it, but let’s actually quantify it and then go get it.

So it’s like, yes, I want that beach house or yes, I want to sell my business for X amount so I can retire with that cash. That’s great. Now let’s put a number on it. Let’s put a date on it. And where are we at compared to that? So we can go and get that progress. What happens when you don’t do this is that you make progress towards your goals,

but you might not recognize it. And so you take that progress and you reinvest it in your business, or you use that progress towards, Oh, some other expenses that might come up or the next shiny object. And then it’s like, your three-year goal is still your three-year goals, six years down the road. Wow. That is so true. That is exactly what business owners do.

So we think that that progress that we made financially, you know, instead of putting it to maybe what you’re saying is this in goal, they just automatically invested back in the company, which could be great. Or maybe it’s not what they should be doing with that. Yeah. That’s really fascinating. Oh yeah. Thank you. Yeah. So curiosity,

I love it. When business owners get curious and they start experimenting with things, but it’s also important to like have a, if you want to be curious and experiment, that’s great. Let’s have money that’s designated specifically for that, but let’s not be taking all of our progress and throwing it at this next shiny object. Yeah. Okay. So being proportionate about what you invest,

where each time you get each time you make progress, whatever that is. So if you have 20, $30,000, instead of reinvesting all that say, okay, we’re going to put 10 to this and then, you know, 20 or 30 to that. Interesting. Okay. So super interesting. So step number one is really quantifying how much it’s going to cost for you to get to that goal and really drilling down on those requirements.

And I think that alone, like we could just end the show here. How many of you guys listening to the show have actually sat down? And I know you all have thought about what you want because you’re entrepreneurs and we’re creative. And that’s what we do. How many of you have actually sat down and crunched the numbers to figure out what it’s actually going to cost for you to get there?

Connect with us, like send us a DM on Instagram Sweetlife podcast and let us know if you’ve actually crunched the numbers. And we’ll do like a little poll on our Instagram story on this with the week. This show airs, because I guarantee you, I mean, tell me Megan, how many people actually that come to your, like, this is going to cost me a million dollars.

I’ve had one client in my five years. I’ve had one, one that’s like had everything set up and she’s like, I know exactly how much I want for my daughter’s wedding. I know how much I want for my retirement. I will know how much I want for Beneta da. Great, awesome. That was so cool to come across. It’s like,

all right, let’s work on the next step. You’ve got this covered, right? That’s right. Yeah. Okay. So yeah, it’s a 90% of people will not have that 99.9% of people will not have that. Okay. So after somebody identifies really how much, what that’s going to cost the next step you say is really assessing their progress towards that.

Is there a certain frequency in which a business owner should stop and take a look that you recommend financially about how they’re doing? Is that quarterly? Is it monthly? Is it yearly? Is there a routine that you recommend entrepreneurs are in assessing, not their monthly? I mean, this is not a show about monthly operational costs. This is a show about where I am,

as opposed to where I want to be in my future. Right. So if it’s set up correctly, you’ll just be able to look and see, okay. Part of it is just taking that money out and hiding it from yourself in a special place. That’s either getting interest or invest in somehow to protect that progress and maybe do some work for you on the side while you’re not watching.

So I’ve lost my train of thought a second. When you triggered something, when you said it’s it’s mom mode, it’s our mom brain. No, what I was saying was I feel like as business owners, if somebody is like 30th of every single month, you should do this every single quarter. Should you do this? So I think that entrepreneurs,

you know, we’re super creative people, but when somebody gives us a system, we love systems. We geek out on systems too. So do you have a consistent system where you say to your clients, Hey, we’re going to have a, check-in call every quarter and make sure that your money’s moving, where it needs to be, and you’re still on track or we need to assess what’s happened so far or just regular,

like a routine that you recommend businesses really pay attention and reassess. Yeah. I actually have only a few numbers that I want my people to pay really close attention to. Because if I tell them to, you know, start pull your financial statements every month, it’s one of those things that, eh, I got it, they pull up, open an income statement,

they look at the bottom line. They’re like, yep, that’s about right. And they move on, right? It has no meaning to them. So I actually pick a few numbers, like one that you might need to watch weekly and other that you’ll want to look at monthly and another, that you’ll want to look at quarterly just to make sure that things are going along the way that they need to be.

And we’ll do that deep dive, more quarterly. But one of the most important, one of the most telling numbers is your 60 day cash in 60 days, how much cash am I going to have in the bank to run my business? And then we make sure that what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t going back in and what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t hurting the business.

Cause that’s, you know, you don’t want to be taking out too much cash. And when you can see what your cash balance is going to be in 60 days or other types of business, if you’re like retail and you have busy seasons, we actually take that out much farther. They want to know where the cash is going to be. Cause that’s the blood.

We don’t want to be donating blood if we can’t afford it. Right. Right. Right. So smart. And so the next thing you say is to name the cash before it comes in, let’s talk a little bit about that. What do you mean by that? So once we have that cash projection created, we know what we think our cash is going to be coming in for the next couple months.

And now that we think we know what that cash is, we’re going to have a purpose for it because if we don’t have a purpose for it, what’s really easy to do is to spend it. If we don’t know at that way, coming in as man, those coaching programs, the advertising, the marketing, all it’s, it’s sexy and it’s fun and it’s,

it’s new and it’s novel. So we actually name it like, okay, we know that next week we should have about 2000 coming in. And two weeks after that we have 4,000 coming in and then we know where it’s going out in terms of expenses. We know where it’s going out in terms of the progress towards our goals. And we know what’s being set aside for a little sandbox fund cash and owe taxes.

Don’t forget about taxes. I do taxes and taxes yet. So you actually say Before it comes in, so you know where it’s going versus where somebody like myself, I have a tendency to not just name the money to actually spend the money before it comes in. So in my mind, I’ve already and I don’t actually spend the money, but I think maybe I do that.

So in my mind, it’s already saying this money is coming here for this. This money is going to this and it’s not like robbing Peter from pain, Paul, but I definitely know where my money is going well before it gets here. And so I feel like I’m doing good, according to what you say in that area. Although I’m sure that the categories in which I named my money could use some work.

And like you were saying, so you’re saying taxes, of course, business operations. And you’re saying that we really need to pay attention to the 60 day cashflow. And that is the key numbers are our listeners should be paying attention to, is that correct? Yes, that’s right. And on that cashflow, you’ll see the different categories. You’ll see,

like the marketing that one can get out of hand really quick. You’ll see the tax and all of those buckets, because truth is to get a little bit accounting, jargon ish on you, not everything that is cash out actually appears on your income statement. So your income statement might show that you’re showing have a profit, but cash is like, did you know that you paid yourself?

And did you know that you had these debt service payments? And there it goes, what you thought was your free cash flow. Right. Okay. And I’m sure this happens all the time. It’s just why people need somebody like you to make sure that you’re helping them protect their assets. So the third step you say is protecting this actual progress. So as businesses,

they have their structure in place or they’re getting their structure in place. What does it take to actually do that and put that structure in place so that the money is accumulated in the appropriate buckets so that they can reach their goals. How do you put this structure in place for your clients? So I have a really easy Excel tool in all my clients have to do is put in their bank balance.

At the top of that tool, like open up the bank balance today, it says $7,500. And it will tell them exactly what to do with that $7,500. If something’s going to stay in the business, if something is going to be moved to pay themselves and put it in their pocket, or if something is for their goals specifically for that, and going to move directly to,

I work with a lot of like personal finance people, like go put that in that account over there and your personal finance, personal take care of it. If they don’t have a personal finance person, I’m like, go put this in your savings account, your money market, account, your investment account, and just let it be happy over there. All by itself will take care of itself,

right? Who are The primary clients that you work with? I work with creative females primarily, and between being told that you’re creative and between being told that you were a woman you’re generally taught from a very young age, that numbers aren’t for you. And so when it comes to those conversations and showing people visually how this works so they can get that shift of,

Oh, this isn’t hard. I totally get this. I’m smart enough. I’m good enough. And now I feel like I am a true business person. I feel like I’m in control of my business. It’s really cool. Yeah. Super. It feels super powerful. It’s such a rush when yeah. I think as, as women, as men,

they just are expected to, but as women, when we finally take control of the numbers, it’s such a, such a feeling of, I don’t like to use the word empowered because it’s so overused, but this is a perfect instance in which she used that. And so I love, absolutely love what you do. So now I’m going to put you on the spot and I didn’t prepare you to ask these questions,

but I really want to know what are your favorite books for women founders when it comes to being smart about money? Do you have, besides your own? So let’s talk about your book, you know, getting your money. Right. I know that I hear a lot of people whose agenda and Cheryl’s book, you’re a, bad-ass at making money, which is more mindset around money.

It’s not money strategy. I personally actually loved that book. Are there any other books or resources that you recommend that our listeners who might not have a healthy relationship with money in the first place can use to kind of dive into reset their perspective? Yeah. So profit first was transformative for me. Mike McCullough is a great guy. And when it comes to bank balance accounting,

he’s the King and that’s what we’re doing and using what he has built and expanding on it. He’s really good. He’s really funny. If you listen to his books, listen to it on two X and he’s hysterical the other, I’m actually going to stand up and get the author’s name cause I can hear it. Oh, I love it. Thank you.

And then we’ll make sure you guys that we are sharing, we’re sharing these resources in the show notes too. Along with Megan spoke to one of the things that I know that businesses struggle with is just understanding the fundamentals of money. And it’s really interesting. I have a lot of clients that are CPAs and that are accountants and you know, that are finance coaches.

And it’s interesting to see as we’re helping our finance coaching clients build their business, how they approach scaling their business online and developing their coaching service versus our other businesses because they already know. So a part of the strategy is also part of the structure and the foundation of the money. It is that profit first approach. And it’s a beautiful thing as a business development coach,

you know, to go through and watch. And they’re saying, okay, well, this is the way this is going to be. And they’re very, they’re very strategic about that as far as being entrepreneurs themselves. So I, I love to ask these kind of behind the scene questions like about your own business and how do you do this and what are some of the resources that you love for your own business?

Just because I think that teaches a lot as well. So what was this other book? Cunningham has a couple of really great books. His blueprint to a successful business is like, this is why you need to understand the numbers in your business and how they make you incredibly profitable when you understand them. And he’s also not about all of the nitty gritty bits and pieces of the numbers.

It’s just the overall picture of how it flows together and how it works. Yes. Awesome. Cool. Thank you so much for sharing those. Okay. So in closing today, we have talked about how to not only protect your goals, but how to actually make your goals come to fruition because you are quantifying them to figure out the importance of how much your goals and what that looks like is going to cost you.

We talked about the importance of actually assessing your progress on a regular basis and naming the cash before it comes in and making sure that you are hiding and you’re protecting your money and you are not giving 100% of your profit back into your business that you’re pulling out these small chunks of this. And that’s a really big deal, I think for a lot of our listeners as well,

because especially in the first five years of business, like every dime they make, they put back in, and that does, you’re saying that’s a risk factor of, you’re just putting off that amount of time to even start working on their personal goals. Is that correct? That’s right. Yep. They need to start getting rewarded for the work that they do,

change your relationship with your business. Yeah. And then in your book, this ebook, you have getting your money, right. What does that look like? What are some of the things that our readers can expect to really learn from you in that book? So there are three types of numbers that you need to know in your business. There is the number that tells you,

where am I at? Like, where am I even at relative? How did I get here? What direction am I facing? When, where am I? And the second one is, well, hang on a second. Where do I want to be? And that’s the quantifying, this is what I want my from my business. This is how I want it to serve me.

And then the numbers that tell you, are you on the right path? Are you doing the right activities or does something need to shift? Do we need to take a detour in what those different numbers look like and how you can find them? Great. And so you’re going to, you’re going to dive in and guide our listeners through that process. Megan,

thank you so much for being on the show today. I appreciate your expertise and your wisdom and your sense of humor and just really making this so much more fun than I think that entrepreneurs experience a lot of times when we talk about money and being so real about the fact that you don’t have to know all the nitty gritty terminology, but these are the basic three numbers you need to know.

And our listeners can find out more about that by downloading your free book, which we will make sure there is a link to that in the show notes of this episode and where else can our listeners find you Come on over to Meghan dolly.com or connect with me on Facebook. I love conversations to begin to sit back and have 15 minutes of coffee together, sometime if you want,

Love that. Okay, perfect. We’ll make sure that those links are in the show notes. Thank you so much for being a guest. Oh, thank you so much, April. This was fun. Yes. Appreciate you.<inaudible> Thanks so much for tuning into this show. Here is a reminder that you can get all of the notes that we talked about today,

including all of the bonuses and strategies by visiting Sweetlife co.com episode one 99. And if you are in a place where you’re ready to develop your signature offer or your program now is a time to get in through pre-registration by joining our wait list for our, your signature offer and program masterclass coming in 2021, I would love to work with you and extract your expertise to create your intellectual property,

to make you be this beautiful leader and your space to learn more about our, your signature offer masterclass, simply visit signature offer.com. I’ll talk to you next week. We have episode number 200 coming right at you and almost four years of Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Rolling out so excited and you appreciate so much have a great week.

Episode 188: How To Self Publish Your Book To Grow Your Business – with Alexa Bigwarfe and April Beach

Alexa Bigwarfe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App

Who This Episode is Great For:

Small business owners who want to write a book but need to know the steps, how to approach the process, and the ins and outs of self-publishing. If you’re considering self-publishing a book but you don’t know where to start, you’ll leave this episode with clarity and simple steps to take action. 


Learn the difference between self and traditional publishing, what your options are to sell a self-published book, the benefits of self-publishing, well-known influencers who’ve chosen to self publish, as well and the 4 steps to start self-publishing your book! If you have a book in you but you aren’t sure where to start when it comes to self-publishing, this is the podcast episode to binge with guest expert Alexa Bigwarf, founder of Write|Publish|Sell and Women In Publishing Summit. 


  1. Know the 4 steps to self-publishing your book
  2. Understand the differences between self and traditional publishing
  3. Get insider secrets about creating your own self-publishing imprint
  4. Understand the connection between brand consistency in your book and business design

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to the sweet life. When you were in business podcast, this is episode number 188 in everything we’re talking about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88,
because we’re giving you a ton of resources. Like we usually love to do here on this podcast. If you, and I don’t know each other yet, my name’s April beach. I help entrepreneurs grow and scale their business online and develop their internationally leading suite of signature offers. One of the things that you get here on the show, our business strategies you can take to the bank.
So every one of our experts is vetted and I myself have been coaching entrepreneurs to grow and scale their business for over 24 years, we are so glad that you are here. And today on the show, I’m really passionate about this topic and our guests. I’ve become a really good friend with already in a quick period of time, virtually. And I’m super excited to introduce you to her.
Now, let me give you a little bit of background story. You might not know this, but one of the ways that I grew one of my first companies was by self publishing a book, and it was really powerful. You guys, as a matter of fact, this book sold copies everywhere and still to this day, that company, the secondary business consulting firm that I own it’s called baby planner,
inc leads the industry in business consulting for companies that market to new unexpecting families. And the reason why I still have that reach and notoriety in that space is because they started out by self publishing a book on my expertise in that niche, niche, whatever you want to call it, right? But here is the deal. Here’s the truth. I made a ton of mistakes and some of the mistakes that I made ended up costing me a lot of money and ended up costing me a lot of time.
And if I knew more about what I was doing, instead of just doing it and winging it, then I think that my results could have been a lot better or at least a lot less painful. And so today on the show, Alexa, big Wharf is here and she’s going to walk you through the power of self publishing a book you’re going to be blown away when you hear some of the most well known influencers that we all like love and follow and really admire in that they have chosen to go.
The self publishing route. Alexa is a USA today, bestselling author speaker, and publishing partner. She coaches others and offers publishing solutions to those who want to grow their business and share their story through writing a book. She’s the founder of write, publish, sell Kat biggie, press purple butterfly, press Chrysalis, press, and the women in publishing summit,
which I’m so excited to be able to speak at her summit coming up here in spring of 2021. And so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. You are going to know the quick start steps to publish your book. The difference between self publishing versus going through a traditional publisher and actually getting a literary agent. So we’re hashing out all of this for you today on the show.
And you’re also going to know how and why you can use a book to increase your known well known expertise in your space. So a lot of great things coming your way. This is a great show for those of you guys who are new in business, and you’re just trying to start your platform. And it’s especially an incredibly good episode for you to listen to.
If you have been in business, you have a platform, but you’re what we call like the best known secret. We need to get your voice and your expertise established even more in your space. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of the show notes again, can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88. And if you haven’t yet be sure to join our new online community business networking app.
It’s totally private. If you haven’t heard we’ve ditched Facebook groups, we’re super excited about it. You can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com, where you’re going to get all your podcast insights and bonuses in there. All right, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> All right. You guys welcome back to another sweet life entrepreneur business and podcast episode.
And I’m here with my new friend, Alexa, big war, and we met on Instagram. I was really happy. You know, I’ll be really honest. I don’t meet a lot of people on Instagram, but I totally just want to hang out with and have coffee all the time. But Alexa was one of them. And since then we’ve had a chance to connect deeper and I’ve learned more about what she does and frankly,
you guys really need to know what she does. So Alexa, just introduce yourself here. Welcome to the sweet life podcast. I’m so glad that you have given us a chance to hear all about your expertise. Well, thank you so much for having me and I feel the same way. I mean, I found you, we started connecting whatever, and then of course I do what I always do.
I obsessively like Googled everything, started listening to your podcast and was like, Oh my gosh, she’s saying all the things I need to hear right now. So that’s fantastic. I’m a writer, an author, an author coach, a publisher and a mom, which is a very important part of my story because I didn’t set down this path. I never thought about running my own business or ever even being an entrepreneur.
And sometimes, literally life gives you lemon and you can choose to make lemonade or you can choose to fall to pieces. And without going into all the background, in a nutshell, we lost an infant daughter. She was one of a set of identical Twins and she passed away at two days old. And that took me to blogging. I mean, as you can imagine,
going through anything like that, like I just started, I had, I’m a passive aggressive person and I didn’t necessarily want to share all my feelings face to face with people, but I had a lot of feelings that I wanted to be sharing. So I started blogging and writing about grief and loss and writing about twin to twin transfusion syndrome, which is what they had writing about life in the NICU,
because her twin was a one pound 10 ounce, one who spent a long time in the NICU. So lots of content for blogging and eventually decided I wanted to write a book for grieving mothers. So that’s how my publishing journey started. I figured it all out on myself. I did the things I needed to do fell in love with the process, started writing about parenting.
And I go authored a book called lose the Cape realities for busy, modern moms and strategies to survive. We should’ve gone with a shorter subtitle, but it was at that point really about the second book where people were like, what are you doing? How are you doing this? I want to write a book, tell me what to do. And so a business again,
I love that story. I’m sorry that it started out with so much pain and heartbreak. And I mean, you’re right though. I mean, those are some of the things that we just are so compelled to do. I think some of the best, most powerful companies are started with a deep rooted emotional story like that. And I agree now, writing is such a healing tool.
It can really be an excellent tool for helping people come through trauma, come through grief, come through just anything they’re going through. So that’s actually another Avenue that we really do is work with people on writing to heal because it was such a massive part of my process. Yeah. So give everybody kind of an overview on your company. So write, publish,
sell, and you have the women in publishing summit. So let’s go ahead and lay the foundation and then we’ll dive into what you’re going to train us on today. Great. So I started write, publish, sell as an opportunity to charge people for all the questions they were asking. Right. I started doing the things that were really hard for people to figure out,
like lay out an ebook conversion and how to find all the things that you need to write a book and all of that stuff. And through the process, I created a publishing imprint and created a publishing house. And then another one, and then another one, that’s a whole different story. But you know, I wanted to be a bigger part of the process than just helping someone lay out their book and help them load it to Amazon.
But actually what I found was that where I really enjoy working is not in the, I mean the publishing side. I’m glad I have that experience, but I liken the whole process of helping people figure out what the book is that they should write and why. And then kind of project managing it is really the best thing to get it through from there to publish.
And we work with authors who are self published, who are traditionally published and who are hybrid published as well, which is kind of a cross between the two. I love this process of helping people find the resources and figure out what to do and how to do it. And that’s how the women and publishing some, it was born because I really much like pod-casters,
I think we love showcasing resources and tools and people and putting them in front of the audience of people who need them. So we took that route to create this big basically like week of encouragement and support and educational resources and really a shout out to the women who are writing books, selling books, editing books, creating covers and layouts for books, the whole gamut,
because we just don’t get enough credit out there. It’s so exciting. That’s so exciting. That’s what, so we can just lay it out there, even though it’s going to be months after this particular show airs, but that’s going to be spring 2021, right. Is so women in publishing summit. Okay, great. We’ll make sure that you guys get information about that that’s coming up.
So this is actually a really good place to start. So let’s kind of start out with some basics here. What is the difference between self publishing and going to traditional route of having a publisher? And I understand that obviously it’s not, everybody can just go get a publisher there’s you have to have a certain audience and a platform. And so that’s really difficult,
but many people are self publishing. So talk to us About the difference. So it’s interesting because in the past, And in this time that I’ve been involved, Like we’ve seen self publishing explode. It started at about 2000. Well, it started a long time before that, but it didn’t really begin to be mainstream until about 2009, 10, 11,
12, with the addition of e-readers and Kindles. I mean, it’s hard to imagine what life was like, but it’s own. They’ve only been in our world for about 10 years and it made such a big difference. There are definite reasons why certain people would want to choose their traditional route other than the self publishing route. But for entrepreneurs, the self publishing route offers a really,
really great way forward because you have full control, you do it on your timeline, you make the decisions. So just to back up quickly, when you seek a traditional publishing arrangement, basically there are people who require that you go through an agent or through solicited manuscripts. And then there are a lot of smaller and midsized publisher that allow you to just go ahead and submit your idea for nonfiction,
which is where I would assume most entrepreneurs be. You have to draft a really detailed proposal. They want to know what other books are out there like it, how yours is different, what you can do with it. And I’ll, and it’s a great process for learning and understanding your book. But it’s a very, very timely process. Even if you’re not working through an agent,
even if you’re going directly to a publisher. And then when the book gets to the, or you don’t have to write the full book before you go traditional publishing, actually you just have to create that summary to send to them. And they decide yes or no. The advantages obviously of publishing is that you don’t have to figure out all the pieces of the puzzle.
You, somebody else is going to do it all for you, depending on the size of the publishing house, you may or may not get an advance. It surprises people to know that there are still people getting paid hundreds of thousands of dollars in advances, but those are usually like the Oprahs of the world and that Renee Brown’s a, you know, a hundreds of thousands to millions for somebody and in our sphere,
if you have a good book that the niche that they’re really wanting to fill and the ability to sell the book is a big, big factor. You may, you make it between a 10 and $50,000 advance. So for some people that’s a huge incentive, but for most entrepreneurs, self publishing professionally in a way that doesn’t look like you’ve just thrown it up on Kindle by yourself,
where you have a great cover design, you have great perfectly formatted interior design. You have a perfect cover. You’re following the industry standards. That’s a fantastic route because you can do it on your own time. You can choose what your cover looks like and work with the professionals to make it just right. You know, you generally have the audience already in place that you know is going to be interested in the book.
So definite pros and cons to both sides, but for a lot of entrepreneurs, I bet most of you are familiar with Pat Flynn. He’s self published his books. Um, there are a lot of entrepreneurs. If you were to start looking through Russell Brunson, the key is they’ve worked with professionals so that nobody can tell that their book is self published.
They created a publishing imprint, so that it doesn’t say published by Pat Flynn. It says published by whatever the name of the company is that he or the imprint that he created. So I assume the next question is How did you know? Yes. What is a publishing imprint? Yes. So this is awesome. So they publishers do it too. If you pay close attention to books,
sometimes you’ll see, I’ll make up a random name. Like I think Tarcher is an imprint of penguin, which is an imprint of random house, which is it’s like smaller delineations for the self publishing world. What the imprint means is that you’re creating a name associated to the books that are published. So when you go to Amazon or you go to books,
a million, or you go to wherever, it says published by Kat biggie press or purple butterfly press or Chrysalis press it. Doesn’t say published by Alexa, big Wharf. And you can create an LLC behind that. If you want to you, or it can be a DBA under your own business, some people will make it their company name. So you could have the Sweetlife publishing house or the Sweetlife press Sweetlife books.
People can copyright and trademark things obviously, but generally you can make it to be whatever you want it to be and associate it with your books. Just it’s another step to make you look just a little bit more professional, have a little logo, you know, all those kinds of things. Formation. I think when you dropped names like Pat Flynn and Russell Bronson,
and the fact that they self publish, I, a lot of people are like, wow, I really want to write a book, but I want to be taken seriously. And so when you drop names like you did, you know, some people didn’t know they self published because of that exact reason. And we do actually have our own, we have Sweetlife press.
So, so I have, I have written two books and self published, two books, and it was Sweetlife press in which we did that. And that’s exactly what we did. And so I do understand that process. One of the things that was really interesting as you were talking, I was remembering colleagues and friends and guests that I’ve had on the show.
And I still remember interviewing Denise Duffield Thomas and she was on the show, got a couple years ago and she had just released, I think it was chill preneur. And I remember one of the things we were talking about on that show was that they came back with her and they’re like, this is the cover of your book. And she’s like, why mrs.
Not what bit, you know? And she didn’t have a say, I mean, that’s the cover that the publisher chose for her book. And I still remember being in that interview and thinking, gosh, you know, I didn’t realize it would be that strict and they chose her cover and that was it. And she’s like, whatever I’m going with it.
I know it’s a great book, you know, but this is a cover. They chosen it. Isn’t what I had chosen. And so that’s a great example. And then also I still remember back. So I had a literary agent back in 2009 that approached me to write a book. I had little babies. I think my youngest was like two and a half years old.
And my oldest was only six. And he was so, so excited. It was such a great opportunity. And this agent was like, great, but the deadlines, I couldn’t meet the deadlines. There’s that too. And it was it. And it was exactly what you were saying. I was like, this could be a great opportunity, but I am in this business owner,
mom, life survival mode right now with these children. And there’s no way in hell. I’m getting you all of this by Friday. I mean, this is completely impossible for me. So I didn’t continue with that contract. I defaulted out of that contract. Um, and so as you’re, as you’re talking, I’m remembering kind of some of these things and saying,
okay, I get it. I get it. And just for our listeners, you know, it’s so interesting to again here, because you know, we’re always worried about our personal brand and what the perception is. And we’re going to dive here in a minute to the benefits of writing your own book, which is establishing you as an expert. So you don’t want to look like a cheapo because you’re publishing your own book,
right? You don’t want like, well, I couldn’t get a publisher, so I’m just going to put this out there and hope that people buy it. That’s not what we’re doing. That’s not what we’re talking about. So I love everything that you said. So my next question for you is when you self publish, where are your options to sell your book?
Okay. So you book anywhere these days. So it’s funny, the stigma behind, you know, the self publishing, like I remember years ago when I first was like, I’m going to self publish my book. Like the impression that a lot of my friends had was the first thing that came out of my girlfriend’s mouth was, Oh my gosh, please tell me it’s not going to be one of those horribly written books as 99 cents on Amazon.
But it’s growing beyond that. Like the industry around in the published books has grown so immensely that that’s really just the stigmatism that we carry, but that the rest of the world is moving beyond right now. So now I forgot what you asked me, but Oh, basically like where can you sell it so you can sell it on Amazon. But if I want my local bookstore to carry my book,
I can just Approach them just like a regular, why would any other retailer to sell my product and be like, here, here you go. You absolutely can. And in fact, that’s how most people, indie self published books are now showing up in Barnes and noble and target and all these places. It comes down to just like anything else, your ability to market yourself,
to know your target audience and how you approach them. So bookstores and libraries want to make money. If you know that your book is a good fit for the traffic, they get to their store. And even better, if you can bring something to the table, like I worked with one nonfiction author who approached the bookstore and she said, you know,
this is my book. I’d love to sell it here. But even better than that, it’s a natural book for a, she teaches a course from her book, right? So she was like, I’d also like to bring in my book club, my organization and these people in my workshop, basically, we’ll meet here once a month. And now it’s like,
wow, you’re bringing clients as well with a great love. That totally makes sense. But you have to have it positioned so that they can buy it. And that’s the thing that you can’t put it on Amazon and then go to a bookstore and say, will you please stop by book in your store? It doesn’t work that way. So those are the fine things that you have to learn about.
And those where the expert inside trading secrets When we work with you, I’d never would have even thought About that. Of course. Okay. So let’s talk about the benefits of writing a book. So what we’re talking about here, this isn’t a free book. This isn’t a freebie that you give away as a lead magnet. This is a book with your intellectual property,
your area of expertise, your methodology, your systems, your ideas, your direction, or, you know, precision about how to accomplish something. And it’s not this freebie that we’re talking about. So let’s dive into really, like you said, one of your areas of specialty and expertise is helping people figure out what the heck to write about how do you really guide people through making that decision in order so that it’s going to align with their business area of expertise,
or do you kind of have people that just start out as writers and the might not have a business yet? All of the above. It’s funny. It’s a wild world right now, as entrepreneurs, as writers as all of us, like the doors are wide open for us to create our own path, basically. So I have worked with authors who have come to me,
who have said, I’ll use my friend, Shelley, as an example, she was child has a food allergy. They also have a large family. And she has written a book about how to eat healthy on a budget. So dinner for a dollar is her thing. She wrote her book first and then she wanted to launch a business. So we had to,
you know, create the right path for that to happen. She came to me with her book already written. I helped her do the publishing and then launching and all of that kind of stuff. But then I’ve had other people who have come to me, you may be familiar with sparkle, hustle, grow Julie Ball, the founder of that subscription box for female entrepreneurs.
Like, I mean, No, I’m kidding. It’s created a wonderful product that people love, but now she’s growing her business beyond that. What can she do beyond subscription boxes? So she started a course, a boot camp for people who wanted to create subscription boxes and then a mastermind. So with her, when we were thinking about the right book for her,
it was how do I get something for that group of people who maybe aren’t ready for the course yet are still in that idea of, should I even create a subscription box and definitely aren’t ready for her mastermind yet so that she doesn’t have people joining her program, who aren’t ready for it, wind up asking a lot of questions because they’re very, very new and don’t know these things.
So her book, when we talk about the entryway to your big business funnel, it’s the perfect funnel because it’s a book about how to start a subscription box, what things you need to know, what her process was, what she went through. She uses a lot of examples from other box owners. And then at the end of it naturally, you’re like,
okay, if you’re ready to rock and roll, here’s your next step? Right? So she’s selling a book and she’s potentially growing her next level audience, hugely Perfect ideal audience. And it certainly can separate you and make you an expert in your space. I love that. That’s a perfect analogy as well, especially with the product funnel in that example.
So for people who are listening right now, they’re like, okay, I want to get started. I’ve been thinking about this for a long time. And I know you guys are listening out there and you’ve been thinking about doing this for a long time, because like 90% of the entrepreneurs and business owners I talk about have said, Oh, I really want to write a book.
I’ve been thinking about writing a book. So what are the steps to actually get started in this process for somebody who’s like, this is it, you know, 2020 is my year that I’m no longer going to drag my feet in this, but where on earth do I start? Okay. So to me, the starting places, always first and foremost,
identifying your goal of why you’re writing the book, what you’re trying to get to. And if you can identify that right away, like is it book sales because if selling books and getting on a best sellers list and getting interviewed on Oprah is your goal, then it’s a totally different path. If it’s to grow your funnel entryway into your business, if it’s to give a low cost.
So maybe you have a high end coaching program that lots of people can’t join, but they still want to know your knowledge then is it a solution for that level? Or is it, are you a newer business owner? And you’re really trying to establish your credibility to be known as the person on the street to come to talk to about these topics, to gain speaking engagements,
to be a step ahead of other people, applying for different opportunities, et cetera. So it can be a combination, but those are the general, like three different areas until you get to superstar status. And then it’s because people are telling you, you need to write a book, but for those of us who are not superstars yet, it’s generally one of those three areas.
So really having a clear understanding of that. Yeah. Let me just recap those so that people are really clear. So understanding obviously your why, so is it PR and you really want to be seen on Oprah, whatever that is. And so really making sure that media attention, I know that, and I do talk to a lot of business owners that are interested in that,
and that is obviously a really difficult path. And there are a lot of things that, that need to happen in order for that to happen, especially from an audience building standpoint, then as you certainly number one, number two, a product funnel. So as a product funneling into your other programs is a natural lead in and number three is just establishing your voice and growing your list as far as initially,
did I recap those correctly? Yes. And there are lots of in-betweens and you know, it’s funny because sometimes people will start thinking that they want to do one of those three things. And in the process they realize they have a personal story that they really want to share, and they can’t move beyond that until they write their personal story. It’s interesting.
Like once they get the idea started of, okay, I’m going to write a book, then they veer off in a different direction. You know, I’ve worked with authors who started have almost completely finished one book, and then they were like, I can’t move forward with that until I’ve addressed this issue. And then they wrote a book about how they overcame breast cancer and how other people can do that too.
And then came back to their business, this book. So, so cool. And not a surprise, not a surprise, you know, entrepreneurs we always want to create in creating is so healing. And I think for a lot of business owners, okay. So first figuring out step number one, figuring out what the purpose of what you’re doing is what’s next.
So for me, the next step is sitting down and figuring out the purpose of the book itself. Like, what is the reader going to get from it? Are you teaching them something? Are you sharing knowledge? You know, what are you doing? Are you doing it? How to book, are you doing a self help book? Are you doing a memoir figuring out that and creating an outline.
And this outline is a, sometimes a scary word for people, but it’s really just a, okay, I know I want to get the reader from a to Z and these are the things that have to happen between them and you jot them down in a list and that will help keep you on track and motivated to keep writing that book. So that’s step two.
Then step three is taking some time to either figure out all the steps in the process of publishing or determining. I just want to hire somebody to do all the steps of the publishing for me. And then you figure out who you want to work with basically, or you start researching how to do it yourself. Right? Name simultaneously. You’re writing your book.
Yeah. Okay. So let’s kind of talk about that for a minute. So for business owners that, you know, have a ton of things on their plate, how do you recommend people get the greatest productivity or focus? I know everybody’s different as far as writing, do you say, Hey, take a whole week and go on a retreat and rent a cabin in the woods and write your book,
or do you say, Hey, spend one day a week or three hours, or how do you usually actually recommend for people that are trying to balance all the things that, that they’re trying to balance and get their book? Really? I think the first thing to do is take an audit of what you’ve already created. And we do this through what I call my Quickstart program,
my QuickBook program, I’m actually working on the name of the system itself, but it’s, um, how to get what you already have available to you and start from there because the reality is most of us who are growing businesses have some level of team with us, right? So if you take that initial outline and you’re like, these are the things that I want to cover a next natural step is to pass it off to your VA and say,
go find everything that I’ve already created on this topic. Podcasts I’ve been on webinars, I’ve run all of that stuff and create that vault of information first. And then you can pick and pull things from that. It’ll also make it, if you work with a collaborative writer or someone who’s helping you get the book written that that’s an easy thing to hand off to somebody else.
But, you know, I think to be very honest, like this is where the overwhelmed just gets to them. Cause they’re like, Oh my gosh. Now I have to actually write a book and panic and breathing, you know, all of that, like, you’d be surprised how many people stop right there. They decide they’re going to write a book.
They know what the book is and then the brakes come on because it’s that next step that’s so overwhelming. But there are lots of ways to make it less overwhelming by starting with what you already have. You know, it’s so interesting as you’re going through this, this is our step by step process. Very similarly that we work with businesses to develop their signature programs and offers the outline,
assessing your assets. It’s the same exact process. And it’s true. You know, once they figure out what assets they already have that are going to accomplish a certain stage of that outline in this book, people just realize when they’re like, Oh my gosh, I have to actually go to work and do this. And you know, we have a lot of guys that listen to this show,
but working from home, which many people are and having the distractions, I think there is something super overwhelming about the ability to have an find uninterrupted time. And if, if like, if you’re like me, I have to get on a roll first. So for me to write, I actually have to be in the mood to write, I mean,
whether it’s music or working out first or lighting the dang candle or whatever it is, I have to be inspired to write. And I’ve ran into those problems before. And it’s actually even this way sometimes with recording this podcast where it’s like, if I’m not in the mood to create it, I’m just not creating it. So maybe if, you know,
if our listeners, if you guys are listening and you’ve been in this spot where you’re like, Oh my gosh, I have all this done. I want to keep writing my book. Maybe you’re like me and you’re super emotionally charged and you have to find the right environment or the right pre-activity to get your brain flowing. Because if somebody is like, okay,
well you have to sit down and write from 11 to one. You know what I’m not doing from 11 One writing and this just the way I personally am. Yeah. I completely agree with that. And that’s, that’s why I liked the idea of just sitting down and saying, well, one, you can always hire an accountability partner or a coach to like force you into one hour,
which is all it takes me is one hour to get somebody book out of them and sit down for one hour, go through all the steps that we just talked about and the preparation for it and have this skeleton, because it’s amazing the psychological difference that it makes. Once you have a list of topics just to start with, and then beyond that, you just start feeling.
It’s like, Oh yeah. I remember when I was interviewed on April beaches show, we talked about this, fill that in, in chapter six for that’s what I want to talk about, or you know, that type of thing, or you pick up your phone and you blocked somebody or however you communicate with your team. And you’re just like, here’s the brainstorm I have.
I know I want to include this information, this information, this information, go write it down on a list, go start, you know, filling in the gaps. It takes that overwhelm of sitting down and thinking, Oh my gosh, I have to spend these three hours just, you know, creating the best thing that ever happened. I’m sure.
You know what it’s like when you hire someone to write copy for you, whether it’s your newsletter or your sales page or anything like that, when you start from something that’s already existing, it’s so much easier to craft it and to recreate it, make it sound like you pull out the pieces you want than it is to start from scratch. Well, and that’s the power of working with somebody like you to do it.
So yes, if I had somebody like you to sit down with the deer, like, okay, April for the next hour, I’m going to pull, extract everything out of your brain. Then I would be there with bells on. And that’s exactly. I mean, that’s, that’s a difference. So those of our listeners that are really serious about doing this,
if you’ve been dragging your feet, It’s probably time to get somebody to guide you through this process. Like Alexa, When does the design come in? Is that usually something that takes really a while? Or do you write all the content first and then drop it into a design? How has that process fit into this? So our process and there’s, there’s lots of freelancers.
There’s lots of companies that help with this part of it. But what we do is we get the final edited version from the author when there’s no more changes. Obviously we do a proofread after that. So there may be small changes, but when the content is written, it’s been edited, it is done. Then we have a team of designers and we pick the right designer for the right project and we send it to them.
They do their designing skills because here’s the thing. I’m just going to be brutally honest here, because I can’t say this out loud to people, to their faces, but it breaks my heart when I go to a conference or an event and somebody’s speaking and I’m like, I have to get their book. And I go to the book table and I pick up their book and it’s not formatted properly.
And it looks a mess. And as a publisher, like I’m very in tune with what the industry standards are. So it annoys me probably more than the average person. I’ll, I’ll admit to that, but I can’t buy their book cause I can’t read it because that will drive me. So we have people who know, book, industry standards who know formatting,
who know how to do these different things. We send it to them. They do a couple of mockup chapters. We get back to the author, we say, does this look like what you were envisioning? Kind of like the same idea of designing a cover or graphics or anything like that. We come to an agreement and then we flow the entire book and then they get this beautiful lead designed and laid out book that then we can upload anywhere.
They want to publish their book. Fantastic. And it looks like the brand that they need to represent. And I think that that’s the concern that a lot of people have about self publishing is just really not knowing how to approach this and not knowing how to do this correctly in a way that is going to position them as a brand leader or as an expert or whatever their goal is for that book.
And I it’s the same thing. I mean, it’s like you, you love somebody and then you reach out and you go to their website and it’s not working or things are clicking, right. Or their logo sucks or, you know, whatever it is, it’s all part of the package. Right. And yet I think that another piece that people think is that it’s going to cost like thousands and thousands of dollars because you do see these programs that are like a $25,000 investment.
And I’m here to tell you that you can find people who will do it very professionally and very well, and you don’t have to mortgage your house to pay for the services. And it still looks really, really branded like you would want it to be. And that’s one of the things that we consider, like, are there fonts that you love? Is there a certain layout or things that you use in your things as business owners?
The branding is a huge part of what the cover and the interior looks like a hundred percent having an all uniform with that style guide across, well, this has been so helpful. I appreciate all of your information because you have given our listeners so many steps and so many different things to consider and there’s actions they can take at this point in time, or at least that they know that they can come back and tap into this episode again,
in the future when they are in fact, ready to go down this road, how can people get started? You have a quick start guide for our listeners. I want to make sure that everybody is getting their hands on also so that they can be in connection with you regarding your women in publishing summit and all of your services. Yeah, sure. So if you head over to write,
publish, sell.com, and if you go forward slash Quickstart, That’ll be kind of the freebie download on a recap on some of the things that we covered today, plus some additional resources on, on where to dig deeper, to find out more on those types of things. And then we also have write, publish, sell.com for jumpstart, which is our one hour workshop to help you outline your book.
So if you’re ready to go at that point in time, it’s a very small investment for that one hour to get that done. Wow. That sounds so awesome. That sounds incredible. I think everybody should join the workshop. I mean, one hour and, and see what you have after that and really getting inspired. I think that’s, that’s super great.
Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait to continue to connect with you offline, personally. I know that our companies are going to be connecting again in a lot of ways in 2021. And so I’m excited about that and where can everybody find you on Instagram or LinkedIn and really what’s the best social platform for people to connect with you?
We’re pretty active on, on Instagram with write, publish, sell, and with the women in publishing summit. And I also have my personal account there. Alexa, big Wharf. I’m Alexa, big work on Instagram and then pretty much write, publish, sell anywhere you want to go. You’ll find us awesome. Thank you so much for your time.
I appreciate you. This has been amazing. Thank you. You’re welcome. Thanks.<inaudible> All right, guys. Thanks so much for listening to this week’s podcast. Again, this is the sweet entrepreneurial podcast and all the show notes and resources we talk about as well as our business development programs and how you can find Alexa and get started with publishing can be found by visiting us online@sweetlifeco.com
and get the insider scoop on everything podcast and all of the amazing business bonuses that we give you by joining us in our business community. You can do so right now, by cruising over to sweet life, community.com and create your business profile to network with other companies actually get traction. You might even find some awesome clients in there and get direct business support from me.
Thanks so much for tuning in. I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 178: How To Use LinkedIn To Grow Your Business Organically – April Beach and Judi Fox

Judi Fox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for anyone trying to grow their LinkedIn connections to intentionally grow your business (new or seasoned) to connect with the right people and build professional relationships. 


LinkedIn is the best B2B social platform that exists. However, few people know how to use it, what to post, or what strategy to follow to make the right-profitable connections. In this show, Judy Fox, LinkedIn Expert, shares a simple and powerful strategy to accept the right connections and her 3 part system on the best content to share. 
At the end of this show, you will know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and what to post, when. 


  1. Have a simple LinkedIn connection strategy
  2. Know the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn
  3. Understand how to organically grow engagement with the right people at no cost

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to episode number 178 of the sweet life business podcast. My name is April beach. We have not met before. I teach Me as an entrepreneur is to develop programs,
courses, online business options, to grow and scale your business faster. So glad to connect with you here and everything we talk about is delivering a business strategy or a marketing strategy to help you achieve the goal of business growth, which leads to lifestyle, freedom to create the life you really want with your business growth profits. Today on the show, we are talking to those of you guys who are interested in growing your LinkedIn profile.
So LinkedIn it’s been around forever. You and I both know that, but very few people know how to use LinkedIn. And a lot of people still believe that LinkedIn is just a place to pop up your old resume and leave it there. And as a matter of fact, it’s changed so much in the last couple of years that this will be the fifth,
maybe even the six different podcast episode that we have recorded about LinkedIn, because I really feel like it’s an important platform for you to grow your personal brand or your company brand and for you to connect with your ideal clients and increase your sales. But the truth of the matter is, is I don’t believe that my company has been using LinkedIn as well as we could.
As a matter of fact, if I had to rate the way I have used LinkedIn on a scale of one to 10, it would probably be a four and that’s not good. That’s not passable for profitable business. And so today’s guest, I actually hunted her down and so she could share resources and strategies to help all of us increase our sales and the right connections on LinkedIn.
So this episode is for those of you guys who are trying to grow your LinkedIn connections, intentionally want to grow your business, whether you’re a new business or an established business, and you don’t know how to do it on LinkedIn, the last two episodes, if you were tuning into the show one 77 and when 76, my friend AIJ Wilcox was on the show and he was talking to us about how to grow your business on LinkedIn,
by paid advertisement. But this episode is all about how to organically grow your business on LinkedIn, without spending a dime to we’re going to dive in with today’s guest at the end of the show, you’ll know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and you’ll know what to post. And when, so this show is going to help you have a simple LinkedIn content strategy,
no, the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn and understand how to use them organically to increase your engagement and connect with the right people without spending a dime. So excited to dive into this show with Judy Fox and with you. So let’s go and do it.<inaudible> All right, you guys are welcome back to another episode of this sweet life business podcast.
I am here with duty Fox. And let me tell you a little bit of the background story of how Judy got here. First of all, you guys I’ve been on LinkedIn forever, as long as I think that you can have been on LinkedIn, but I’ve never really figured out how to use it, how to leverage it for my business. And I knew that there was some strategy that I was missing.
We know video is King meat. We actually have done LinkedIn shows two years ago, but it still didn’t connect in my own brain. And regardless of what my team says and tell something connects in my own mind, it’s just honestly, just not going to happen. And so I’m sitting on like 120 LinkedIn invitations, and I knew there was some strategy that somebody out there knew in order to help me connect on a deeper level with the right people on LinkedIn.
And so I went on a hunt and I think it was in one of my Facebook communities I posted or somebody else’s community. I posted other, I said, I need a LinkedIn connection expert. I want them on my podcast. I need it for myself, selfishly and personally. And I know that all my clients need it and millions of other business owners and professionals need it as well.
So we are joined today by Judy Fox. And let me just read her bio and then I’m going to turn it over to her. She’s super impressive. So we’re both gonna have a great time today and we hope you guys do too. All right. Judy Fox hit 3 million views in 2018 on LinkedIn and has been featured in inc com as a topic. My video marketer and speaker at vid summit,
social media week, video marketing world broadcast your authority, authentic leadership summit, and more or less with over 18 years of experience in business development and sales, Judy Fox is a superpower positioning clients online and his authority as an authority in their space, building highly engaged audiences and getting more inbound opportunities. Now, Judy, I want you to introduce yourself and as you do it,
instead of me reading this, cause sometimes that’s just weird. Yeah, it does. But you have something here. Call them LinkedIn business accelerator. Talk about that. And then we’re going to dive into a ton of different LinkedIn strategies for those of you that are entrepreneurs and business owners here on the show. But first of all, what is, is business accelerator?
Because the fact that there is even a LinkedIn business accelerator tells me and many of our listeners that we’re missing the boat somewhere on making more money by leveraging LinkedIn. Yes. Oh my gosh. So I can’t even express how excited I am by the LinkedIn business accelerator because people who implement this literally hit millions of views either in weeks to months. And they are being asked to get on radio shows,
asked for podcasts. I have one client literally got shared by Arianna Huffington who has 9 million followers on LinkedIn. So there are people on LinkedIn who are getting access and getting featured in Forbes. And I just had another client get featured in BBC news. So, I mean, I could go down the rabbit hole for LinkedIn business accelerator, but the point of it is it’s a 90 day program.
It’s a container of leveraging the, what you really need to new do, and not all the things you need to do. What can you do in five days? And I will show you that it will grow your profile views by 2000%. I’ve had some clients literally get 200000% increases because it is just putting the gas pedal down on actually the things that work for what you do in person,
how to show up online and do the same thing. And it’s like a translator. Okay. First of all, we’ll put all of the links to the show notes. So you can find Judy and all of this information in the show notes for this week’s episode, which is number 178. So a couple of things we’re going to cover today. And I like most people have numerous questions about,
well, one of the things that I love about LinkedIn is it’s really powerful for companies like mine, which is strictly. And we just had Aja on the show, you know, AIG and Aja. And I jammed for a couple of episodes on paid reach through LinkedIn. Then he has his own take on that because that’s his area of expertise. But first of all,
what type of businesses do you think should be active on LinkedIn right now? Oh my gosh. So this goes back to my human. I even put this in my profile. I do human to human marketing. So as I mentioned, I have 18 years experience and I started my career as a chemical engineer. I then moved my way up. The corporate ladder in a fortune 500 company was being groomed and trained for the C suite and throughout that entire process.
And especially at some points in my career, being that business development, the seller, the Dewar role throughout all these corporate experiences that I’ve had. And the biggest takeaway is I am a human gatekeeper. I’m still a human being who was the gatekeeper to sometimes millions and millions of dollars at these corporate offices, corporate contracts, proposals requests for proposals. So all of these processes,
I kept saying to myself, I’m being sold to I’m selling other people like it’s this whole circle. And I kept asking myself, I’m just another human being that’s in that gatekeeper position. So I come to a conclusion that if you are human being and you are wanting to amplify the message that comes out beyond yourself. So say for example, we are attracted to other human beings and that’s why we have these influencers that we hire and we pay good money for.
And they advertise our brand. Will, can you imagine having your entire company filled with influential people who are leaders of your company, they can be that way on LinkedIn. And it’s a very natural space for them to be that way on LinkedIn. So it’s almost like we’re just amplifying the message of humans. And that’s why I say almost anyone can be on LinkedIn.
I know that sounds really blunt, but I’ve seen artists who are doing amazing. There’s a woman named Casey who shows her artwork and she is getting a hundred thousand views sometimes on her artwork. And she’s selling out in minutes because she’s visible. We know she exists and we can grab onto her content. And, and we can only imagine how many people are online.
Every single need that you have as a human is still a part of you. When you go to work, sometimes you’re willing to pay even more. Wow. Cause you want it done for you. You want that painting that she put out there because it looks amazing. Maybe it’s great for your corporate office and you want to buy it. Maybe it’s great for your background of your podcast or your video and you want to buy it.
Do you see what I mean? Like the corporate and professional world, I feel like it’s all merged now. I love that example. And I love that case study. I actually have a good close friend of ours will day it’s real day art it’s on LinkedIn and in his paintings, I can’t even venture to say what some of his opinions began at,
but he is on LinkedIn. He does really well. And I feel like I’ve seen that expansion, especially in the last two years where also being a mother and working from home forever. I’m seeing also things that I would never expect to see, but I think I personally pick up on it, just who I am as a human being, things about breastfeeding or things about self care or things that aren’t so much lack and white.
This is business things that don’t appear to be, as you were saying, corporate black and white content that they’re silent. And The only reason I have to say something so quickly is because for how many years were we told what is considered corporate, but it’s also considered corporate because they didn’t necessarily have as a male dominated industry that I’ve been in, in the engineering world.
Those conversations wouldn’t have existed anyways. So I am the leader that I want to be in the world and the leader that I want to be allows conversations for both male and female things that we all face. And just because men aren’t breastfeeding in the workplace, it doesn’t delete that. That is still a professional conversation that needs to happen because it’s work related to talk about raising children.
And it’s not just a female thing. It’s men and women raising children. And I, I challenged, like I love Sarah Blakely’s LinkedIn profile. If you go to her profile at the bottom of her about section, which is making it very clear that I memorize people’s about sections. She actually says my goal and mission in life is to balance the masculine and feminine energies Because that Is a powerful mission and goal.
And I, I love, I love following her. She was just on a LinkedIn live on LinkedIn. She did it from her RV where she’s on the road with her husband and she is still running her company and doing all the things, but showing up as a parent, showing up as we’re parents and all parental conversations matter, They do, especially.
Yeah, that’d be a rant, especially now in the last, you know, in the last three months. And I’m actually looking forward to the way that business models are going to change that it is much more holistically incorporating our role as parents, as well as leaders and executives, business owners and everything else. So I’d love that. Okay. Yeah.
You and I could jam on that all day, right? Here’s my primary question. We talked about it a bit and started before we started recording. The first strategy I would love for you to share is the answer to the question. What the heck do I do with all of these crazy amount of LinkedIn invitations? I know there’s a strategy behind it and for our listeners,
it just randomly sure. I’ll accept your invitation. It’s just random. Just click button, easy to accept. There is a deeper business relationship low that we need to mind. And I know that there is, but personally in my business, I do not have a strategy to do that. And that’s why I hunted you down. And so I loved your strategy.
And can you please teach us your strategy? You rule of thumb in how you approach connections on LinkedIn. So they immediately are the right connections for you. Yes. So first I love that we’re diving into the direct messages because I have spent my most of my business with my direct messages, creating opportunity, creating business. That’s where it’s all going down and the is on LinkedIn,
but it’s not going to happen if we give our attention and spread ourselves too thin, we all understand that as business owners, we can not be spread too thin because when we spread ourselves too thin, we’re not really serving anybody. So I love the idea of taking radical ownership. This is my direct message experience. You’ve come into my world. You are invited in and I get to decide where I want the relationship to go,
not you. So I really like that. That is clear in my head. I don’t have to tell them that, but that’s what I’m thinking. It’s my mindset. And that I get to look at your profile except you very, I except pretty quickly, I would just say accept, except, um, that one looks a little something’s off. I go with gut instinct and sometimes I reject or click ignore.
I would say it’s 80, 20 rule, 80% of the time. I’m accepting connection requests. 20% of the time I’m saying ignore because something just looks off. You kind of know, maybe they don’t have a profile picture or maybe they don’t fill out their profile completely. And they don’t have, they have weird letters in their about section something, but I don’t click into their profiles,
just judge on quickly looking at their titles, looking at their profile picture and their name with that. You can turn around and if you want to take action on, like you said, they’re on my turf. They could be somebody I could warm up. They wanted to connect with me. I could turn around and say, thank you so much for connecting.
Cause I’m just acknowledging. There’s no message. There’s no nothing. You’re just starting from scratch. And we’ve heard over and over. And I was just listening to Shaylene Johnson the other day. And she reminded me of there’s a million people reminding us it’s 20 to 30 touch points before somebody becomes a purchaser, especially if you have a higher ticket or high trust business.
So why would we think that any conversation in the first message is going to convert, we have to have way more touch points. So what I do is I have a generic message that says, thanks for connecting. I love to get to know new connections in the comments on the platform, see you online, feel free to follow my hashtag Fox rocks,
Doody Fox. And by having my own personal hashtag, it creates a very easy light pitch clickable link that sends them to my most recent content. Love it, bam. They don’t have to navigate through my profile. They don’t have to navigate to where you find your most recent posts. Cause every once in a while, somebody will say, I can’t find where your most recent content.
It literally takes you to a newsfeed of Judy Fox Of Judy foxes, hashtagging, and just a side step. So for people that have no LinkedIn started using hashtags, what like two years ago now, but they do well. And so some of the hashtags that I follow on LinkedIn, they only have, you know, a few things coming up in the feed.
Whereas if you all have that same hashtag on Instagram, for example, you’re buried in millions and millions of posts. LinkedIn is there yet. And I love that hashtags in general, but I also love that you have your own branded hashtag, which is so cool and what a great way. Okay? So somebody sent you an invitation. You don’t click on their profile.
I don’t know if I like that too. Sometimes that LinkedIn always tells people their profiles. You don’t necessarily know their profile judging USS just based on the information from the invitation. And then you copy and paste this super nice relatable response saying, Hey, great, you want to connect with me? You know, go ahead and follow My hashtag. Yes.
What is this do at this point in time? What happens after this? So what happens is I either have people say, Oh my gosh, that’s great. You have a cool hashtag or the responses I get are I’m excited to engage in the comments or, you know, if they are respecting the boundaries, the only other message that is freaking awesome is when they turn around and they say,
I’ve been following you for awhile and I’ve been commenting and I love your content. And then isn’t that a great next conversation because I know you’ve had 10 to 20 touch points potentially. So you’re finding out by just that message, by the way they respond. Number one, are they going to respect the boundaries, which you didn’t make them harsh boundaries? You just said,
I like to do this. This is my it’s like a soft boundary. And then if they push back with like, that’s awesome, I have been watching your content. I really blah, blah, blah, something, whatever. Maybe they start a conversation. That’s super hot because you’ve positioned yourself already. And you wouldn’t know that unless you did that message.
It’s without pushing them to tell you, I hate the, why did you connect with me? Right. Okay. Now I have to do all this work to explain. It almost feels defensive. Whereas this one opens up the door. It’s like a slight door, but it also opens up the door to just being amazing comment conversation on the public platform.
And if that happens, you’re just gaining attention on your content, you know, a thousand more views or one more comment or one more share. Yeah. And at that perfectly brings us into the next thing that I want to talk about. What an amazing organic way to increase, increase the eyes on your content. I mean, this is brilliant in so many different ways.
I’m super stoked to be connected with you and love learning from you already, Kelly, my assistant is going to be like, Oh my gosh, April’s going to have 10,000 things for me to do on LinkedIn, send you a connection request. You send me a connection request so I can practice my new DM and come up with my experience. It too.
It’s fun to make your own gifts. Oh, okay. That’s alright. I have a waving. Hello gift. Are you serious? That’s another way to give people one more experience in LinkedIn direct messages. That is not the same as everybody else. I’m not trying to pitch. I’m waving. Hello. And it’s just a nice gift that I can upload really quick.
And it’s in the gift library. I love that. All right. There’s a million things that you can do is send Judy’s gift to you, everybody Fox and shout out to Chad who helped me first launch my gifts. Yay. Thank you, Chad. Okay. All right. So Let’s talk about the content we’re posting on LinkedIn. You have three different personalities that you talk about as recommendations for ways that individuals can show up on LinkedIn.
Can you dive into those three different personalities and how to operate within and why they’re really Huntly important? Yes. So instead of thinking, we always come from a place of, I need to be creating content for my business. I need to attract the right clients. And I always tell people, if you start with these three pillars of leadership voice, so it’s this idea that a leader is recognized by the way that they walk through this earth,
by the way that they show up online. And we kinda know when we see their content, but we don’t always put our finger on it. But if you break it down on LinkedIn like this, and I’ll share, I’m about to share, I’ll start with the opposite first, which is too many people think, and they get on LinkedIn, they come from this,
how can I help you? And that tends to be a very, very low hanging fruit that a lot of people grab onto. And they think that their content needs to come from, how can I help? How can I show up for my ideal client? So this is the opposite. So I want you to delete the world of how can I help you?
It’s not a bad world, but it hurts us. It really does. It hurts our positioning because it doesn’t position you as a leader. It positions you as a helper, helping the helpless and people on LinkedIn don’t want to be helpless. They want to be empowered. They want to also show up as leaders. If you have all of your employees underneath you and you are lifting them up and making them feel amazing,
you’re not helping them. You are empowering them. So we’re going to switch to an empower language. And then the next thing we’re going to switch to is the three categories, which are the challenger, the creator and the coach. So I’m going to start with the coach. The coach shows up as a go to resource. You know, when you have a boss that you can trust to go to,
or a leader, doesn’t even have to be a boss, you have a colleague in your world and you know that you can go to them. When you say, actually you did that. When you were saying, Hey guys, I need to crowdsource for a person to be on my podcast about LinkedIn. You already mentioned that. So you’re showing up as a go to resource and you’re allowing your community to show up as go to resources in the comments.
So instead of just holding court and preaching at us, you were saying, Hey everybody, I know you all are leaders. It’s implied by me saying, I need a go to resource, total different mindset. Okay? Yeah. So then you’ve got that energy and you can say, these are my top tools for working from home. These are my,
this is my mindset hack. That was one of my videos I did recently where I broke down my mindset hack. That’s a coach. That’s go to resource for sharing what works for me, but not telling me it has to work for you just saying, this is what I do. What do you do? How can you show up as a leader in my comments?
Right. Fascinating. Okay. So that’s the leader personality. And then the second one you mentioned was the neighbor personality really ENT. Yes. The creator personality. For example, I was mentioning Casey is doing her. Um, we think creative types, but we also think so she’s showing us her behind the scenes, TimeLapse of her video and the psychology behind that is a before and after energy.
We freaking love that because there’s something that connects in our brains to say, how did a creator get from here to here? It’s sharing the journey. So we love the journey we love seeing how did somebody earn six figures? How did somebody get from barely making ends meet to a seven figure business? Like how many freaking shows do we want to listen to online and podcasts?
So there’s that energy. And then the other part of that energy is step-by-step actions. So when we, as a creator can show up either with that before and after energy, the journey energy, the, those types of posts do so well because they’re positioned with that mindset to think, how could I take another human being from a to B, Love it.
I would say that my downfall is that I would just want to hang out in that personality all the time, just because I’m a teacher, that’s what we do here on the podcast. So I think all of my posts would be like, okay, step by step to go from here to there. But you could and sprinkle in the other ones. Yeah.
But I feel like that’s not, it’s just not deep enough, the way that we’re doing it as a company, to be totally honest. I mean, I’ll just throw my own company under the bus here on some of these shows to be like, we suck at this right now. And that’s why we’re, we’re recording this show. You know? And I really do feel like this is something that as you’re teaching and as I’m learning,
and if you guys are watching behind the scenes on the video, as I’m taking notes, I have like crazy Fox notes, scratched all over my paper, hashtag Fox or hashtag, you know, as we’re, as we’re doing this, I just, I can see myself being like, okay, I think maybe that’s all you do. And it’s just a little almost to the point where it’s redundant or shallow or something,
there’s something off about it. But these bats were the last Leadership style allows you to share a bit more of your, I don’t know what to call it, but like it’s called the challenger energy. So where you come across as learning from your mistakes, sharing some of the vulnerable parts of your business. And that’s probably where you can show up in all these other areas and be vulnerable with the coach saying,
Hey, I need a resource because, and that’s the vulnerable part of the story. Maybe there’s a part of that story that is vulnerable to you. But the challenger energy really does have a curious energy. I’m curious why this failed. I’m curious why it took me 10 years to get where I am, you know, and the figure outable energy as Marie Forleo would say,
it’s the energy of wrestling with something and showing that part in that post. So the way challengers show up is the curious questions. It’s figure outable, but you could have a figure outable energy together where you say, let’s figure this out in the comments below. I need to determine how to start a podcast. And I am struggling. There’s a million platforms to start on and it’s a little bit of the go to resource,
but you’re potentially opening up more of I’ve made mistakes along the way. How can I reverse share so you can learn the lessons along with me. I love that. So that would be an example of that Using yourself to the next level too. Oh, okay. That makes sense too. There’s the challenger from the past when you challenge your past, but you can also challenge your future.
And I, I meant to mention that because I didn’t want to leave you hanging with only looking at past mistakes. You can challenge the future. I have one client that made a post and we decided to do a challenge of reducing our sugars together. And so there’s that that’s still a relevant post for LinkedIn because it came across as a leadership. I still would want to see the leaders of my company.
If they are taking on a challenge to exercise, that’s something we want to talk about in business because health and bringing health to the workplace allows us all to operate better and live longer and thrive and have better meetings because we have less cranky people. You know what? I am just going down the rabbit hole there, but, And mentally process faster and all those things.
Yes. A hundred percent. Okay. So at a post that would just come to my mind would be the same. Hey, listen, I’ve stuck at LinkedIn, just starting out. And just saying that as a company, we aren’t connecting here. We haven’t really connected here authentically with the right businesses that we know that we can help. How do you guys do this year?
And so, by the way, If you let other people look amazing and the comments give you advice, it’s powerful. It’s such a crazy thing. It’s so true. But I think that oftentimes that we forget that a lot of the content should be reading. And we talk about this a lot on Instagram. You and I both love Instagram and even Facebook,
even though Facebook and I have a love, absolute despising loopy relationship with each other for a business standpoint. But we know the rule of thumb is, you know, people like to share things that make them look good just across the board. Shareable content is content. People like to share things to make them look smart and tall and wise and experienced and funny and you know,
all those things. And so that really opening up the LinkedIn communication platform with that same sort of philosophy and understanding that people want to show up and they want to feel good about themselves. And they want to position themselves as leaders. Absolutely freaking brilliant. And I’m so glad I found you. And I will say leaning into the leadership voice. The one thing that when you were mentioning,
they want to share because it makes them look good. It makes them taller. It makes them all these things. It also can make them look like their future selves to be a leader at a business like you were showing up as a leader, wherever, whatever space, it doesn’t matter what your title is. You can be a leader in your space.
And there’s something very shareable about that too. The idea of you are their future self and they share your content because they’re like, wow, I would love to write something like that. I’d love to put something like that, video out into the world and what that person shared was so powerful to me. I’m going to share it. And I think the highest shares,
I think I got close to about 200 shares of a post and that went to half a million views. So it is very, very powerful to be shared on LinkedIn when your content is the one being shared. Basically I got messages saying, all I do is get on LinkedIn and see your content. I love it. I can’t wait to binge your content on LinkedIn and spend more time.
I will be for sure. And so let’s do a quick recap about what we talked about today. Um, beside the fact that we talked about the sweet life company sax on LinkedIn, we will not after this show. And if you’re with me and you want to make sure that you are authentically unintentionally connecting with really great partners and affiliates and your clients,
then you have hung out with us to the end of the show and you have listened to the whole thing. And we should be applying strategies to which are pursing. We talked about the DM strategy, having a set response and a gift that you can send to them. And it’s that response that really is like, Hey, great, thank you so much.
Follow my hashtag, which triggers people to go follow your hashtag actually decide whether or not they want to actually connect with you more than it helps to disqualify, which I love just as much as it helps to qualify ideal connections on LinkedIn and it increases or Ganek reach with your content that you’re directing people back to your hashtag. And then you talked about being a leader on LinkedIn and showing up in three different personalities,
leadership, creator, and challenger. And so my next question to this, even though this could be an entirely different show, but just to wrap this up, how frequently do you recommend companies or individuals should be posting on LinkedIn? Currently it is May, 2020, and this always changes with every social media platform. But right now, how often do you think people should be showing up and posting on this platform?
Oh, so I have, what’s the reason why I have this container LinkedIn business accelerators, because you really do have different patterns for when you are a cold audience, a warm audience, a warm audience, and a hot audience. I consider my audience to be hot. On average, when I’m posting, I hit the 300 to 600 to a thousand likes and comments,
10,000 to a hundred thousand views. So with that audience, it’s a different strategy than a cold audience. So I would start with a cold audience and say, you should be commenting. I know that sounds really interesting, but you should be commenting at least 10, five to 10 comments that are high quality in your ideal circles. Your ideal clients go out into that world into your ideal businesses and conversations you want to be having.
So go out and do five to 10 of those a day. If you can do, if this is the ideal growth strategy, and then you would post two to three times a week. I have some of my clients right at the two posts a week and they’re getting anywhere from 10 to 20,000 views a week. So that’s that strategy. The next is what I call my it’s that warm audience there,
you should be testing and playing around a little bit more. And if you want to ramp up commenting, because again, commenting just changes your entire business. And some businesses drive more traffic by commenting and more business by commenting. Some do really well on video. So it’s almost like playing around in that medium area. That’s where I work with my clients to figure out what’s your sweet spot.
And then I come up with a sustainable strategy. So my sustainable strategy for myself would be different than yours. But mine, for example, is I have a pattern of video document posts, text only post or image posts. And then I do about one post a week because I’d rather have my audience trust that every time I post it’s high quality. And then I go out and I do a ton of comments because I ended up getting more business from engaging with my ideal clients and commenting and showing interest in them.
And then they ended up showing more interest in me. So I ended up having a lot of clients that have never liked and commented on any of my videos or content. I love that. And those connections then go back and happen in the BMS to close deals and land condoms, the same plants. Yeah. I convert business to the direct messages, or I set up my Calendly link to live on my LinkedIn profile,
which is another powerful way to position yourself. It’s right there, but it has an application process to it. And the main reason why is because any human being can see your public profile, if you have your settings on public. So I do want to have you fill out a few basic questions. Do you have a LinkedIn profile or you, do you have a website you want to share with me because some people might be starting from scratch.
I honor that, but I also just want you to have a gate because I can’t have everybody book a spot on my calendar. Also it’d be on the phone calls all day long. And obviously in any case with that too, just free screening appointments where they get to you. That’s yes, that’s incredible. And it’s pretty easy to set up with Calendly and it’s a very powerful part of your that’s why I call it LinkedIn business accelerator,
because I literally want you to get business. I have some clients, I had one client, I just did our second zoom call. One-on-one zoom call. And she said, I have been asked to be on a radio show. Now two podcasts, a live stream. And I’m now being asked to give a keynote presentation at a company online meeting because now everything’s online.
And I was like, that’s only after two weeks. And she was like, I know I just blown away. I love that LinkedIn has come. I think my first LinkedIn training I ever took was an old Lewis house, even though Lewis houses and alas young, it was like Lewis Howes linked, influenced training 2012 or something like that, Which is basically I remember the set us house days,
how to set up your profile. And I love big blue it’s health span anyway. Okay. It’s certainly come a long way. And I, I think as business owners, we’re starving for a platform that we can trust that we can engage in a very real way where we can count on generating high quality. And there is just so much missing from understanding how to do this on LinkedIn.
You don’t have to sort through all the noise on Facebook and even all the noise and other places like YouTube or Google ads or SEO, which is so many different ways, actually like we were saying on a human level. And now it’s always been my preferred way to sell and connect with clients. But now in 2020, we are seeing so much that relationship sell.
And it doesn’t matter if you are a multimillion dollar business or if you are hitting your first six figures, no relationships, relationships sell. And I love, I love your strategy you taught today, and I really appreciate your wisdom and your time, the best today. Do you So welcome. I appreciate yours. I can’t wait to, I can’t wait to bench this And you guys can check out,
go to Judy Fox, J UDI, fox.com. You follow her hashtag Fox rocks yes. On LinkedIn. And we will go ahead and make sure all the links that we discussed today are available for you in the show notes of this episode, which can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com slash one seven eight. Thank you so much. I appreciate your time.<inaudible> Thank you so much for sticking around to the end of this show.
I trust that you gained some very profitable and wise insights from Judy and from our conversation today. And I would love to know what your biggest takeaway is or what the action that you’re going to apply to your businesses. First, based on what you heard on today’s show on LinkedIn, share it with me, connect with me. Who’s over to LinkedIn search April beach and send me a connection.
And I would love to watch what you’re posting and connect with your content even greater. And then of course, make sure you’re following Fox rocks hashtag on LinkedIn, because Judy is certainly the expert. All of the show notes, everything we talked about on today’s episode, if you’re driving and just can’t write it down, all you need to do is remember episode number one 78.
If you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 78, everything they talked about and all the links we mentioned on today’s show will be found in there. I hope you haven’t Awesome. I will talk to you<inaudible

Episode 177: LinkedIn Ad Strategies To Increase B2B Sales – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Launch Your Online Programs

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 


In this episode, we cover who should be running LinkedIn Ads, the 4 types of ads that can be run on Linked, and what you can expect to spend to get results. LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com and host of “The LinkedIn Ads Show” dives deep covering what you need to know as a business owner. If you’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure if it’s the right choice for your business goals, don’t miss this episode. 


  1. Know your ad budget
  2. Decide what kind of ads you should be running
  3. Know where to access your Ads account to get started. 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey guys and welcome back. This is part two of a two part LinkedIn ad strategy business podcast training. This is episode number 177 if you missed one 76 and you were wondering about the fundamentals of LinkedIn ads and whether or not you should be even advertising on LinkedIn at all.
Stop this episode. Go back and listen to that one and then catch back up with us here we have J Wilcox in the house with us again and he really is my favorite business person right now because I have been waiting months and months to get him back on the show. I’ve had a ton of questions. And in last week’s and in this week’s episode you also hear a lot of behind the scenes and what’s happening in our company is I own two companies and some of the ad strategies that we’re using and then some of the questions that we have.
So you not only get a business training with these two shows, you’re going to hear a lot of behind the scenes about how we’re using advertising to grow our company as well. So I always try to be transparent with you guys and share with you actual case studies, whether it’s clients or in my own business. And then we have ADA, the expert here dishing exactly step by step how to go about doing this in your own company.
So in this show, it is an extension, like I said of last week, and we’re talking strategic ad strategy for B to B sales. So this show is, especially for those of you guys who have a business that serves other businesses. In this episode we’re covering who should be running ads on LinkedIn, the four types of ads that can be run on LinkedIn and what you should and can expect from your LinkedIn ads results.
At the end of this show, you are going to know a LinkedIn ad budget. You’re going to have a baseline ad budget that if you can’t come to the table with this ad budget, don’t come to the table at all ages really upfront about that. And so we have a come to Jesus moment about how much you have in your marketing. And so you’re not wasting your money or your time.
You’re also going to know what kind of ads you should be running on LinkedIn. And we dive into how to access the ads manager portal in LinkedIn as well as other really cool tracking that you can do even if you aren’t spending any money on LinkedIn ads at all. So we talk about how to install a LinkedIn tracking code on your business website so you can read a massive analytics to make smart choices for your company.
I’m super excited to dive into this part too, and you can find all of the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven seven alright, let’s go<inaudible>. All right, this is episode number 177 and I am back again with my very good friend at least I think he’s my good friend. That’s, he is my favorite person right now in business. AGA Wilcox,
who is then, I mean we last week dove into some really important foundational information about what companies can and should be leveraging LinkedIn ads. If you didn’t listen to the last week’s episode, you should stop this, pause it and go back and listen to episode number 176 you have a good foundation. You know, last week we talked about who should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You know, what type of companies benefit from that. Aja gave you guys the solid steps to start moving forward. For me, what it did is it got my wheels turning and of course, and then I had a million more questions, so I really appreciate him being back with us on the show today. So Aja, can you reintroduce yourself again to those who’ve not met you before?
Please? Oh sure. I’m so good about bragging about myself. I run a little ad agency. There are only eight of us. I mean we’re very small and nimble of eight people, but we are B to linkedin.com and we specialize only in running LinkedIn ads. We are official LinkedIn partners. We’re actually the only ad agency in the world, but certified partners with LinkedIn.
We run many of their largest accounts as well as many of the smallest and everything in between. We’re just hyper specialized and uh, call us one trick ponies, but we like what we do. I love it, I love it. Hey, you know what, be the one trick pony is a way to build a multimillion dollar business right now. And I love that you do that.
So that’s super cool for you. Now let’s just do like a super quick recap. Last week we talked about three different types of businesses that could benefit from advertising on LinkedIn. Can you rattle those off real quick for us again? Yes. Any sort of high lifetime value lead generation, whether it’s B to B or B to C is number one. Number two is higher education.
So think of like universities, MBA programs, recruiting. And then number three is any sort of white collar recruiting that you’re doing as a company just trying to hire new employees. Okay. My first question to that is totally a selfish question. Yeah. As a company, we love to run ads to this podcast, to the right audience for this podcast,
but when we look at the podcast, the podcast, you know, we don’t even run ads on the podcast intentionally, so I’m not talking about a lifetime value of, you know, I can’t say yes, this listener is going to generate me $15,000 plus in revenue. That’s not the way it works. So for just exposing an audience to content, would you recommend That a company or a podcast like yours or like mine advertises on LinkedIn to increase their listenership?
Or is it, wait and we’re going to dive into money. Is it way too expensive? Oh man, I love this question and I have a hard time with it because LinkedIn ads are really expensive. What we’re paying on average eight to $11 a click, and me personally, I’m a huge fan of podcasts. I’m a huge fan of podcasting, but when I look at it,
you can’t quite calculate what a listener is worth and what sort of lifetime value they will end up being in the future. I have a really hard time investing eight to $11 into that person and I personally don’t even advertise our own podcast on LinkedIn for this reason. I just don’t think the economics would work out, but I do advertise the podcast on Quora ads and I would on Facebook and on Instagram just because the costs are lower.
So the economics just gets in the way of LinkedIn’s amazing targeting sometimes. Darn it. Okay. Well hopefully someday that might change. Okay. So diving in today we are going to talk a little bit more deeply about the four types of platforms that LinkedIn ads appears on within LinkedIn. I’m super excited to do that. Different type of ads you can run.
You were talking about carousel ads and different strategies that businesses can use when they’re presenting their ad content to help our listeners decide which one is the best for them. And then we’re also going to talk about money and how much money you need to spend. I remember two years ago when we talked about there was a threshold that you told me April, if you can’t spend at least this amount of money,
don’t spend any. So I’m super curious how much is the minimum that we’re starting to see and then you know even for businesses, how to get started, where to find the ads manager, if you will, actually how to navigate to that within the platform and how to set up tracking for retargeting. So we have a really big show and thank you for joining us again AIJ and thanks to you guys for tuning in.
If you’re listening to this show, it’s because you have a business that you are curious whether or not you could increase your sales with LinkedIn ads. And so you are certainly in the right place. So AIG, let’s first of all, let’s dive into the four different types of ads that someone can run on LinkedIn. Perfect. So number one that I tell everyone to start with is called sponsored content.
It shows up right in the newsfeed, which is the homepage experience on both desktop and mobile. So this is a great way of getting in front of pretty much all your users. These come in several different flavors. There’s static image, which I think everyone should start with. It’s just a single one image that’s so easy to create and troubleshoot. Then there’s also video,
which we talked about last week. I don’t really love video ads on LinkedIn. They’re pretty expensive and there’s no retargeting yet that comes in the fall of 2020 but there’s also one called carousel. But if you’ve used Facebook ads, you’ll recognize it’s multiple images that someone can scroll through within your ad. And to all of these, you can actually fix something called a lead generation form ad,
and it’s a native form that goes right within your ad itself. So someone can convert on your ad without ever even leaving LinkedIn. It’s really nice and easy all filled in from your profile information pre-filled. So all they have to do is just hit submit and it creates some really high conversion rates. Okay, that’s crazy. So when we’re talking about Facebook ads or Instagram ads or any other ads,
we have to send them to a separate landing page and it actually leads the platform, which is a big stumbling block for many businesses who also build their own websites or they have a very small tech team because then they have to go, Hey, I need you to build a landing page. It needs to have a forum and it needs to connect with this CRM.
So you’re saying that LinkedIn can actually put the lead gen form there within the ad itself? Yes. And Facebook and Instagram can do this too. I think Twitter might have actually even had it before Facebook and YouTube can now do it too, so everyone seems to be jumping on this, this horse, but it’s a great feature and one that LinkedIn probably released four or five years after Facebook.
Wow. But I think what most Facebook advertisers have found is yes, it increases conversion rates, but at the same time it lowers lead quality because the user didn’t have to put forth as much effort to get to know you. And so a lot of times they’ve forgotten that they’ve had, the feedback I’ve heard from Facebook advertisers is we contacted them and they say,
I didn’t fill out a form with you guys. I’ve never even heard of you. Right. We do tend to see the same kind of thing on LinkedIn, but we’ll see. Cost per conversion, cost per lead ends up dropping by 30 to 80% but lead quality might only drop by 10 to 20% so you’re still net positive and it can still be worthwhile doing.
Fascinating. Yeah. We’ve never used that tool or that strategy on Facebook. At all, we always, you know, send them to a landing page where they can see really what it is they’re offering and whether or not they want that. So very interesting talking about the decrease in the quality of lead versus the decrease in the cost per lead. Fascinating.
Okay, so that is the newsfeed. So that’s running ads right there in the main newsfeed of LinkedIn, the one that everybody sees. And in the last show you mentioned that you have to have a LinkedIn company page to do so Yes, that’s correct. Okay. Now what are the other places where ads can appear in LinkedIn? So I think the next most interesting is called sponsored messaging.
That’s the category. And as is inherent to the name it’s messages, right? It actually shows up in your LinkedIn inbox or your InMail. These can show up in two different flavors. There’s one called a message ad and then one that’s called a conversation ad. So the message ad would be like an InMail that someone sends to you. Someone opens it up,
it says words, and you can, if you want to respond to that or not. But the conversation ads is LinkedIn’s newest ad format. And think of it like a chat bot. You can ask someone a question and then based off of how they respond, give them a different offer or a different link or ask them a further question. So these can be fantastic if you,
one of the main uses we’ve found for these is a lot of people want to try to push people towards their booths at trade shows. Obviously when in person events become a thing again, but of course if you’re advertising you need to ask someone first like are you going to be at this show? And so if they say, yes, I’m going to be at this big industry conference,
then you can start pushing them towards the booth. But if they say no, you could say, well, Hey, do you want to join this webinar that we’re putting on next week? So you’re giving people more options and a better chance of relevancy of your offer to them. Okay. Couple of questions. First of all, do you have to be connected with people to run message or conversation ads to them?
Do they have to be a connection? No, they don’t have to be connected to you in anyway. When you pay LinkedIn for these message ads, you don’t pay per click like you do with the rest of their ad formats. With this one, you pay to send it to them so you define the same way that you would have defined any of your other ad targeting by job title and company size and industry and all that,
and then they’re randomized to that audience so you don’t have to be connected as long as you paid them their 20 to 65 cents to send it, they will deliver it to an audience that fits your targeting. Okay, fantastic. Question number two, we’re more of just an observation. An automated chat box within LinkedIn sounds amazing. I mean we use messenger chat and different things within Facebook that are so important and so powerful.
This is so super cool. This sort of automation or relationship building, utilizing AI to build relationships with our leads is absolutely. I totally geek out on that stuff, so I love that. But question number three, as a LinkedIn user, I don’t know that I want to receive chat ads in my chat as a LinkedIn user. That might piss me off if some like rando person sends me a message.
Is there any pushback yet on people that are like, dude, get out of my chat box on LinkedIn Because they could only give responses that you’ve coded in. We don’t get free form responses of people like shutting us out or anything, which is probably a really good thing. Maybe in the future if there’s like a, an open kind of response. But Lincoln’s done a really good job of these.
Yeah. As a member you can only receive one every 45 days. So in case you get one that pisses you off, you’re not going to get pissed off again for at least another month and a half. I guess it keeps that uh, annoyance factor to a minimum. Okay. And can people turn this off like all together? Like never send me an ad through my messenger or it’s just this one in 45 days.
Part of being on the LinkedIn platform. Ooh. I think if you go into privacy settings, I think you can opt out of receiving these altogether, but realize that when someone takes me into kind of like a little bit of a DVS mode, but if someone sends you a really crappy one of these, they’ve essentially destroyed their brand to you and they paid just to deliver it to your inbox no matter what sort of action you take.
So I think one of the worst punishments you could give them is stay opted in so they spend more money on you in the future and just waste cash. But I don’t know. Okay. I think that that is so funny. You are super devious. I am more like, I have no filter. I’d be like, dude, this actually, this sucked total squirrel moment.
You know when people send me things that are just terrible, I just can’t help myself. I actually had a company, this is a complete squirrel moment, but funny here, my listeners are used to this with me. I had a PR company pitch somebody for my podcast last week and it was the worst pitch I’ve ever received. I actually felt so terrible for the person that we’re pitching that I went and I hunted down the person that we’re pitching on Instagram,
sent a screenshot and said, listen, if you are paying this company, don’t cause you are never going to land a podcast guest spot from one woman to another. Your business looks fascinating. Please don’t waste your more money on this company. So I am so I’m totally, the person would be like, your message sucks. Do not send me this message again.
What a waste of know. I would even like connect with them on LinkedIn just to tell them their LinkedIn ad sucked. But sometimes that gets me into trouble cause I have a big mouth and I just can’t. So like you, we want to know this stuff. We want that feedback. And there’s a class of people like me who would never tell,
tell you to your face and there’s a class of people like you who would actually inform them that they were making stupid decisions. This was woman was like, thank you so much. She could have been like you, you know? But she was like, thank you so much for telling me. So I kind of like, I kind of held my breath to wait for,
I didn’t know what her response was going to be. They Kevin, she was like, thank you so much for telling me. Okay, so end of squirrel moment. Back to our four platforms where we can send LinkedIn, we have the sponsored content and the newsfeed. We have the sponsored messaging ads, whether it is the message ad or the conversation ad going through inbox or in mail.
Now the next one you said text ads when we spoke before. Yes, so text ads show up only in the right rail as well as the fourth platform, which we’ll talk about here in a minute as well. But the right rail, it’s important to understand is only available when you’re on a computer. So your mobile device isn’t going to show you this.
So that cuts down on the audience that can see these. But what I want you to understand about text ads is they are very, very risk. They are simultaneously LinkedIn’s lowest cost ad and they also have the lowest engagement rate, which means if you screw this up, it won’t cost you very much because not very many people are going to click on it anyway.
And then when they do click, it doesn’t cost very much cause it’s the cheapest ad format you can pay all the way down to $2 per click from these. So if you’re looking to just dip your toe in the water and you’re okay with getting visitors that are on desktop that they’re not on mobile, this is by far the best way to test into your audience and your offers and check it out without really spending much money at all.
Fascinating. Okay. So maybe start there before you send somebody a conversation. Okay. And then the fourth one is a dynamic ad. What is that? Yes. So dynamic ads, you may have seen them, but you just may not know that what they were, I call them LinkedIn’s creepiest ad format. They actually take your picture, your profile picture and stick it into the app.
So if you’ve ever seen an ad that says like, Hey, April, picture yourself at IBM or at Microsoft and it’s like your picture next to the Microsoft logo or IBM logo. It started out as a job placement kind of ad and then they eventually gave it to us as marketers and said, Hey, however you want to stick someone’s picture in an ad,
go for it. So these used to be really expensive and they just reduced the price earlier this year, so to about a third of where they were. So I actually now started recommending these to people there are slightly cheaper than sponsored content, but again, they’re like text ads. They don’t get clicked on very much cause they’re way over in the right rail.
They’re obviously an ad, but they cost less on a per click basis than your sponsored content will. They’re like maybe six to $8 a click rather than the eight to 11 that you’ll probably pay in sponsored content. Okay. That’s really creepy. But kind of cool. I would definitely, if somebody had my face in the right hand column there, I certainly would stop and be like,
what am I doing down there? So very interesting. And I could see like you were saying possibly like picture yourself here, picture yourself doing this. Certainly for the educational institutions, you know that are trying to get people into their higher education programs like picture yourself with your MBA or whatever. Super cool. All right, so those are our different platforms.
And then last week we hit on the video ads really aren’t converting static image ads are doing better. And then can you just share a little bit about the way carousel ads? Like what is a carousel ad, what is this look like when it’s showing in LinkedIn? Because these are the ads we get great results with carousel ads for our podcast. So we will run like an image and we’ll kind of,
people can scroll through within the ad to different podcast episodes. You know you need this click here and they do really well. So is it, is it set up the same way? Yes, in fact it’s a direct rip off. If I say so, I, without getting in too much trouble, a direct rip off of the way that Facebook pulled it off.
So in your newsfeed you will have one ad with multiple pictures that on mobile you can just thumb through, scroll through or on desktop you can click an arrow and just see a variety of things. So podcast episodes is a great use case for this. Same with like an in person event or a summit, you might put like four pictures or five pictures of some of your best speakers that are going to be speaking.
These are great use cases for it, but be aware, I don’t recommend these very much on LinkedIn because they don’t necessarily perform much better than just a static image and they don’t cost less. So I go, well, okay, I could spend the time of essentially creating four or five little ads inside of one ad, or I could just create four or five separate ads and it would take the same amount of time and cost the same.
So it’s kind of a toss up, but certainly it’s a format that’s available to you. Okay, Good to know. Okay, now let’s talk about money. Oh yes, the important importance. Let’s dive into money break down LinkedIn ad spend, breakdown budget. Let us hear it. Just lay it out there cause I know it. Yeah, It’s not cheap,
right? So I’m going to be a little bit brutal here because I’m so tired of people coming to me and going, Oh man, I spent $300 on LinkedIn ads and they just don’t work. And I go, Oh man, $300 like that’s just a handful of clicks. You can’t learn anything on that small of data. So what I’m hoping that you as listeners are hearing here is if you aren’t going to bring a large enough budget to actually test it out,
I wouldn’t bring any budget at all. I would save up until you do have it. And what that budget is depends on a lot of different factors depending on what you’re trying to learn. So here’s what I’ve found, and this has nothing to do with advertising. This is just a data model. If you have, let’s say around a thousand dollars in spend,
and this is in North America, it costs a lot less to advertise anywhere else in the world. So the numbers can change slightly. But if you’ve spent about a thousand dollars on advertising on LinkedIn, you will generally have statistical significance to your click through rate. So what that means is this type of thing that you can learn is if I’m testing two,
three, four different ads that are pushing on a different motivation here, I can find out statistically what my audience likes and what they react to better. So if your goal is just to find out with significance, do people like what I’m telling them is my motivation, right? Am I pushing on their rate pinpoint within about a thousand dollars in ad spend?
Whether that’s over the course of two days or over six months, you can find that out. Okay. So that is really, I think that’s encouraging because I think the last time we talked two years ago, you said that we were going to need at least 3000 to start understanding how people are responding our ads. Yes. And so I’ll, I’ll take that to the next step here.
If your whole goal is just to find out what ad copy are people going to click on, you can do that with statistical significance with about a thousand dollars but now because of LinkedIn’s costs increasing as they have over the last few years, if your goal is actually to figure out what gets people to convert, which offer, right? You know I have a webinar and I have a free guide,
which one converts best? You can find that out statistically within about $5,000 in ad spend. So if your goal is to find out what is my cost per conversion, what is my conversion rate? Don’t spend less than $5,000 and think you’ve got it. But if your goal is just to find out what people are interested in, then you probably don’t have to spend much more than a thousand dollars just to make sure you’re on the right track.
So full lead generation track, I would say don’t spend less than 5,000 budgeted towards it, but you can test on less and just depending on what you want to learn, a portion of that much money to it. Okay. And that completely makes sense why the ideal business needs to be selling a product with $15,000 or greater in value. Because this is,
I mean significantly, I mean we have, we have clients running Facebook ads for, you know, as little as $5 a day. So it’s huge difference in ad spend. But the reason why I love the LinkedIn platform is because it’s really right now, you know, when we go on Facebook, we go on Instagram, there’s so many other distractions.
So when our clients go on there, you know, they’re seeing grandma’s birthday and they’re seeing your advertisement to your high end mastermind and it’s really hard to get people to focus in on the business aspect of it. Our clients are in this place where they really need to reach their target audience who isn’t distracted, who’s there for a reason. I mean and obviously specifically our clients that are B2B,
that sort of other businesses, which not all of our clients do, but it’s a significant portion of of who we consult in business strategy. And so we’re saying $5,000 really minimum ad budget. But the interesting thing you said here, which does it make any sense to me is there’s no rhyme or reason is the time in which you drip that $5,000 out.
So you telling me that that $5,000 whether I spend it in the first two weeks or spend it in five months is going to give me the same data. Yeah. Because the only difference here is time. So if you’re in this period of super weirdness like we’re in with COBIT right now, time can change a lot of things. If you were trying to run the same ad three months ago and it was dripping into,
now you could tell that would make a big difference. But in general, I mean if you’re talking about just a normal quarter, let’s say the same ad going to the same audience where not a whole lot is changing, seasonality wise, the data is going to be about the same. So I would say as you’re testing things, maybe take the seasonality into mind and analyze it a little bit.
But in general, add performance today and add performance six months from now. It’s all gonna look the same. When you combine it in a spreadsheet and aggregate that data together and you really just want to make sure you have enough data to analyze. So five K in ad spend metrics in an Excel sheet is going to look the same whether it was over six months or a single day.
Okay. I think that’s fascinating and I think that’s encouraging to a lot of our listeners who want to get into LinkedIn ads, but they’re like, man, I don’t have 5,000 to invest in it this month, but I could have 5,000 to invest in it over the next six months. So I love that. All right, so next question. Moving on.
There is a very powerful, scary big brother watching you pixel that Facebook gives advertisers to embed in their website so that we can track people who have visited our website and then re target them with our ads. Does LinkedIn have a similar tracking opportunity? Yes. So LinkedIn has an insight tag that anyone who’s listening, whether you spend a dime on LinkedIn ads or not,
you can go and open up an account and install this thing on your website. And it does three things. So the first is like what you mentioned with Facebook does retargeting. So if you have this on your website, you could eventually go into LinkedIn ads and say, I want to show people ads who visited my website before in the last 90 days or something.
So that’s one use of it, which can be pretty good. Number two is you get these free website analytics from LinkedIn that no one knows about but are free and great. So once that tag is on your website, you can then go look at LinkedIn and see the demographic breakdown. What’s the job titles that people tend to have who visit my website?
What companies by name have visited my website, you know like, Oh my gosh, last 10 or the 10 most important, or what industry or what seniority do people tend to be? So I recommend everyone have this. It’s a great tag to have, even if it does feel a little bit big brother. Okay. That’s like Christmas to me. Okay,
so everybody should go in. Let’s talk about now just wrapping this up here in the show we’ve talked about so much. Where do people go to actually set up this ads manager within the LinkedIn platform itself? What does that look like? Great. If you’re already in LinkedIn, you can click on a in the upper right hand corner under the work menu and you’ll see an icon that says advertise,
but if you want to navigate straight there, the easiest way I’ve found is just type in linkedin.com forward slash ads ads and that’ll get you there. You click on the create button at the top and it’ll walk you through the whole process of creating your account if you don’t already have one. Okay. Love that. And then again, another selfish question for me and yeah,
forgive me to my listeners, cause I know this doesn’t apply to many you, but I own two companies and so I have two LinkedIn business company pages and completely separate websites as well. Is it possible to create two separate LinkedIn business ad manager accounts because the audiences are totally separate within LinkedIn? Or do I actually have to create two completely different LinkedIn personal accounts?
Ooh, great question. Yes. One person can be connected to as far as I can tell, an infinite number of ad accounts and you can create as many as you want. So if I were you under your same profile login, I would go and create two separate ad accounts, one for each company and then just run them separately. Love it.
Okay. That makes my life so much easier. It’s not quite as easy. It should be quite as easy, but it’s not quite as easy on the tech side of it for me to figure that out. So I always have to give that to to other people that figure out for me. So I love that. That actually sounds really easy. Okay,
so let’s kind of recap again. Today was part two of our two part training here with the one and only AIJ Wilcox, the LinkedIn ads King himself who is the founder of be two linked.com. You guys should totally go check him out and follow him on LinkedIn. Um, we talked about before different places where your LinkedIn ads can appear, right? So sponsored content messaging,
content, text ads and dynamic ads. You also covered, you know, different type of ads to run whether video ads or carousel ads or static image ads. And then we also talked about the lead gen forums. Super cool. So much information. I learned so much on today’s show and I really appreciate that. And we talked about money, talks about being honest about the budget.
This is not one of those things you can go into passively. If you’re a life coach or you teach yoga classes, you’re not going to benefit from what I’m hearing you say AIG right now on LinkedIn, unless you have a really big ad budget and in less the value of what you’re selling has a lifetime of being greater than $15,000 from a client, from a lead on LinkedIn.
So we talked about that and you guided us through how to find the ads manager and how to set up your LinkedIn insight tags, which everybody, regardless of whether or not you are going to be advertising on LinkedIn now or in the future, should go and create this LinkedIn ads account and get this insight tag so that you can start getting these crazy awesome analytics cause this is what we really want.
And you know, I know a lot of businesses don’t use analytics as much as they should. They don’t look at who’s going to their website, who’s searching this, you know, what are the most common search terms for what I sell in my geographic area. These are things that as business owners, if we have these tools available to us, especially for free,
it absolutely cuts months and thousands and thousands of dollars off of our learning curve of guessing, putting a hypothesis out there and wondering if it’ll work. And I love that LinkedIn offers this tool and I appreciate you so much for just jamming on all this and walking me through this strategy and always just having the best guidance and being super honest with our audience about who this is for and who this isn’t for.
So just totally appreciate you. Thank you. I will. Thanks for letting me share. This is the highlight of my week is getting to just freak out about LinkedIn ads. So thanks for giving me the opportunity. Oh, you’re the best. We totally appreciate it. Okay, so for people to find you again, what is your podcast and exactly,
you know, how can they connect with you the most as far as if they want to get on the phone with you and just say yes, agent, I’m ready to get started on this. Can you help? Sure. So the LinkedIn ads show search for that in whatever podcast player you’re using. I should be in all of them. We have about under 20 episodes so far,
but it’s growing and we go real deep on LinkedIn ads. So this is right up your alley. Go dive in there. And then, uh, if you want to chat, go to BTU, linkedin.com our website. Fill out the form on any of those pages. They don’t go to a sales rep, they just go directly to my inbox, so feel free to reach out and I’d love to chat with you.
Awesome. Thank you so much. And this is sweet life podcast number 177 so for all the show notes, if you’re on the go, you couldn’t take notes, you want to go back to all these links. We’re going to make sure we put them nice and organized for you inside the show notes on our website so you guys can cruise over to sweet life,
podcast.com/one seven seven and hyper connect to AAJ from there. Thanks so much JJ. I really appreciate you absolutely party on Z.

Episode 176: LinkedIn Ads: How To Get Started – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Grow Your Business Online

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 


You’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure where to start, or if it’s a wise choice for your business. LinkedIn is a powerful ad platform, but it’s unlike others and you need to be sure you’re spending your marketing money for the ROI you expect. 
In this episode my friend and LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com covers what types of companies benefit from LinkedIn Ads, the 3 components of successful ad strategies and basic steps to get started. You’ll leave knowing if LinkedIn is the right platform for your business and what types of ads you can start running now.


  1. Decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn
  2. Learn how LinkedIn ads work
  3. Know the 3 components of a profitable LinkedIn Ad strategy 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hey Darren, welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. This is episode number 176 and I’m April leech if we don’t know each other yet. I’m a business development strategist for companies who are looking to launch and scale online and develop online programs,
offers and services to increase your profit and everything we talk about on the show is giving you tools and strategies that you can take to the bank is a matter of fact. If this is your first time here, you will soon know that the business trainings we deliver here on this podcast, a lot of coaches and consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for, so it’s all for you.
It’s our mission in order to grow small businesses and it’s our commitment to do this week after week. So thank you for joining us today on the show is part one of a two part series and I’ve invited my friend AIJ Wilcox to come back and chat with us on this show. We’re talking to those of you guys who have businesses and you want to learn if LinkedIn is a right platform to reach your ideal audience.
So you might’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn, but you’re not sure where to start or if that’s even the right platform for you to advertise in. You know LinkedIn is a really powerful ad platform, but what you’ll learn in this episode is there a lot of businesses that are showing up and putting money into LinkedIn that it’s not really the right fit for you.
And then there are other companies who are showing up in you don’t have the ad strategy or you might’ve been actually spending your money incorrectly on the wrong type of ads. So this is part one of a two part series where Aja and I are diving into, you know who should be on LinkedIn. And at the end of this episode you are going to decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You’re going to know how LinkedIn ads work and you’re going to know the three components have a profitable LinkedIn ads strategy. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and bring AGA onto the show and everything we’re talking about can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven six All right, here we go, you guys. This is episode number 176 and I am so excited because my friend AIJ Wilcox is here with me now.
AAJ has been a guest on this show. It’s been about two years. I hunted him down because I wanted to know more about LinkedIn ads, but the honest truth is I have done nothing with the strategies he me because our business, our ad dollar was focused on Facebook and Instagram. But the truth of the matter is is you know we’re a business to business company and we need to be advertising on LinkedIn.
And so I had to hunt him down again and say, Hey, listen my friend, I need to know where to get started again. And I have so many clients that I believe need to be putting their marketing money into LinkedIn ads and we don’t even know where to start. So who do we call our Ghostbusters friend J Wilcox. So Aja, thank you so much for being back on the show.
Um, reintroduce yourself to our audience so they know who you are. Sure thing. April, I’m excited to be back. Name as a, you know, a J Wilcox. I run an ad agency called B to linked.com and we are a very small, there’s only eight of us, but we’re an agency that specializes only in advertising on LinkedIn. So we go crazy deep.
Everything from teaching people how to run their own accounts, consulting, training, all the way to managing the accounts or are you to get your best performance from the buck. Because as we know from the last episode, LinkedIn ads are incredibly expensive. And so any mistake you make or any learning curve you go through, it has to be financial consequences we’ll say.
So working with a team who understands what works and what doesn’t and kind of cut through all that has been really good for our clients. So that’s what we do. And uh, I think we’ve grown a little bit since we talked last. I think when we talked before we only had two people on the team. I think you have to, yeah,
I’ve seen you all over the place. I think when we talked your kids were little in the background, which they’re probably still a little way littler than mine and you are just like, yes. You know, we’re getting started with this. And even when we talked though, even with just two of you, you were telling me how your agency was handling huge ad accounts for people on LinkedIn with like crazy results.
So let’s kind of start there with just answering the question. Who right now should be advertising on LinkedIn? Yeah. So I think there are three categories of companies that I think are a really good fit. So the first is if you’re doing lead generation of any kind with a high lifetime value, and so in my mind, that’s when you close a customer.
If they’re going to be worth $15,000 or more to you, then it’s pretty much a no brainer. So that’s B2B or even there’s some B to C lead gen that can get in that arena. But most of what we do is B to B. The next is higher education. Things like MBA programs who are recruiting the educational targeting that LinkedIn gives us is really good for those kinds of folks.
And then finally, as you’d imagine with LinkedIn recruiting works really well, just white collar hiring someone. So if you’re looking for a new sales manager, you can target people who already have the title of sales manager in your area and ask them if they’d be interested in applying it if you look interesting to them. And those are the three categories that make a lot of sense on LinkedIn.
Okay. So now that you’ve answered that, I feel like I need to take us a little bit of a step backwards. Is LinkedIn still this place where it’s ideal to use this platform to find a job more of like an online resume platform? Or are we finally starting to see a change in LinkedIn to become more of a social platform? You know,
why are people on LinkedIn? Yeah. If you would’ve asked me before 2014 I would have told you, yep, it’s a job searching platform, but since then, you know, you log in and there’s a newsfeed and then for entrepreneurs like you and me, we love the organic newsfeed because it’s so easy for our content to go viral. We’re able to reach people in the right mindset in ways that you just never could on Facebook or Instagram where competition’s higher.
Right. So yeah, it’s a fantastic platform for communicating right now. Not everyone has adopted and figured that out, but I think that is good for those of us who are ahead of the curve. Yeah, for sure. And I know that’s something we’re diving into more as a company and that’s a whole nother show is chatting about that. So let’s kind of get back to B to B,
diving into client or I should say business type number one. So high value ROI. And so that brings us back to the next question of how do you even get started with LinkedIn ads? Is this something that if somebody says, Hey listen, I have a program or I have a product that I want to sell to this company, this corporation, and I want this corporation to be a longterm client of mine.
Is this the ideal type of business that should be diving into LinkedIn? Yeah. So when you start thinking about like even before you decide which platform you want to go after, I keep an acronym in my mind called ammo ammo. And it’s the three things you need for any sort of social promotion. So the first is a is audience, the M is your message and the O is your offer.
So LinkedIn is so good at targeting the right audience if it’s in B2B specifically because we can target people by all kinds of great things, job titles, seniority, what groups, they’re members of skills, they have company size industry. All of that. So you have that in mind. If you know LinkedIn is a good fit for your audience, then you move on to the acronym letter at the end.
Oh, it’s the offering. We know if you put an ad up that just says, click here to talk to our sales rep, or click here for a demo or click here to buy something. You’re not giving anyone any reason to actually interact with your ad. No one will click. Or if they do, it’ll cost a lot per click. So you gotta have something that’s actually media and interesting so that they’ll have a reason to interact with you.
And then once you know what that, Oh, your offer is the message of what is actually being shown to the customer is really easy to figure out. You’re picking a couple lines of and an image, and once you have all three of those things, it’s really easy to go into the LinkedIn ads platform and build your first campaign and ads, but plan out your ammo beforehand.
Got it. I love that acronym. All right. And so when we’re talking about actually what type of ads do well on LinkedIn, we know for example, on Facebook it’s video, everybody wants video. Is LinkedIn the same? I mean, can we get the same click through rate or whatever LinkedIn calls it for a static image as we could with running a video ad?
Can we run video ads on LinkedIn? Yes. So LinkedIn does have video ads, but I don’t recommend them yet. They’re not quite the silver bullet on LinkedIn like they are on Facebook. And I think it’s mainly a pricing concern. On Facebook, you’ll pay one to 2 cents per person who watches at least three seconds of a video on LinkedIn, it’s 10 to 20 times that.
So we oftentimes see 10 15 20 cents per view, which is just quite frankly more than I think people should be paying. So if you have great video creative and you’ve tested on other platforms, absolutely bring it over to LinkedIn and test it. But I would say for your very first dipping your toe in the water of LinkedIn, start with a static image.
Make it as simple as possible. So that you can read the results. If video ad is kind of hard to troubleshoot, you don’t know if it was your ad copy that didn’t perform or the video or a combination of the two. But if it’s just a static image, you know, it was either your text or your image and if there’s a problem you can fix it very quickly and try it again.
Okay. Thank you for that. That is so interesting. Yeah, we’re getting a, you know, even most recently you and I recording this podcast here real time, it’s not prerecorded. More meeting. This one’s going to drop just in about nine days. So real time. As we’re speaking right now, our video ads on Facebook are at 1 cent.
I mean, they’ve never been cheaper, but you’re right, like the static image ads, you know, we’re seeing, you know, conversions, $2 $3 a conversion. And so we stopped doing those because I just think that’s ridiculous to pay. So good to know that that is a flip because I think for people that are getting started with ads, especially companies that are doing their own ads,
when we throw into them all these other techie things, they have to figure out like you got to do a dynamic video and maybe it should have some music in it and we need to put some text over the video. It just becomes so daunting. I think that entrepreneurs are so busy, they’re like, I’m out. I’m just not even doing that.
And those are the things that we’re telling them and they have to do on other ad platforms. So I love that LinkedIn isn’t that way yet. It’s much easier to get them started. So a question for you now about the static image. Does LinkedIn have rules about the images like Facebook does? For example, there can’t be so much text over an image.
Do people seem to be responding more to just an actual picture or is it a picture with texting? Graphics? Yes and no. So the issue here is that I like probably the rest of you absolutely hate the 20% rule. On Facebook. Yeah, the restriction that, Oh, you put too much text in your image. So Facebook’s not going to show it.
LinkedIn doesn’t have that. But what we find is time and time again in all of our testing is the more text we put in an image that we’re set performs. So I like the freedom that LinkedIn gives you. They’re not going to penalize you for it because we have found some instances where text on the image data improve performance. So definitely test. But I would say keep it in mind that the whole purpose of your image is just to get people to stop scrolling so that they will read your ad copy.
So don’t try to convert someone from the image, make sure the image is bright and colorful and contrasting so that they’ll stop and actually read your thoughtful ad copy that will convert. Okay. Thank you for that. Alright, so now let’s kind of switch back a little bit to my original questions about targeting. So many of our clients, many of our customers,
they have programs that they want to sell. They’re either coaches or service providers. Quite a few of them have corporate programs and so they’re trying to reach the internal champion of that. The one that says, Oh my gosh, look at this. That just came through from the Sweetlife company or whatever. I want to take this to my decision maker. And so one of the problems is finding that internal champion.
So when we’re talking about how to target ads on LinkedIn, like who to run the ads to, you mentioned we can break up ads by title and educational level. Talk to us about really how hyper-focused we can get with direct targeting to specific people to find either the champion or the decision maker that initiated the interest in a company or a program. Oh,
I love this question. So here’s what we can do. If you know the individual title or role that you’re trying to go after, then you can build a campaign targeting just people of that title and role in that company size, in that type of industry. And you can go all the way down to the minimum audience size of 300 so I like to use the example because it’s so easy to picture.
If you want to target just the CEOs of the fortune 500 you can do that. You can target job title of CEO at this list of 500 companies and you can hit them all the way down to an audience size of just 300 so I like to kind of break an audience up into two different levels. There’s the person who’s actually feeling the pain. Then you have maybe the influence,
maybe not the influencers, maybe the actual signers, the decision makers, and depending on what stage of that process you’re trying hit, you could target one or the other or both at the same time. So if I’m going after marketers, for instance, because I am a marketer, I think like this, if I’m selling a an advertising tool, I might show an ad to the individual contributor level,
the person who’s actually pulling the buttons and turning the switches. I guess you can’t really turn a switch, but you get the idea. Yeah, I can target them with an ad about, Hey, wouldn’t this make your life easier if you could do this faster and more accurately? And then I might target more of like the manager and above or director and above maybe just the VP level with messages like save money by your employees,
being more, uh, more efficient at building ads quicker. And you have that freedom because you can break them up into two different camps or five different camps if you want and show them all different creative messaging. Yeah, so smart. Okay, next question. Can we geotarget ads? So if I only want to run ads here in Colorado, can I do that on LinkedIn?
Yes, you can. So up until about three months ago, LinkedIn’s GOs were really limited. They were only like Metro areas. So for instance, in Colorado you might have like Denver Metro and you’re like, Oh, well what about just like a specific zip code? You couldn’t do it. But since then LinkedIn has integrated their geo targeting with the being Microsoft data.
Very cool. Yes. If you’ve ever used Bing ads, it’s a great platform. Rivals, Google ads. And about every way you can think of. And it’s half the cost. So they’ve merged those data sets. So now you as a marketer, you can target all the way down to an individual city level. We’re not zip code, we’re not radius yet like you can do on Facebook and Google,
but it’s a lot more specific. Okay, I have a million questions for you. Ha. You’re my favorite. My favorite person right now. Okay. So when we’re actually for those people that are listening, we’re actually going to break this podcast episode into two because we know you guys are short on time and so we’re going to have to really short,
hard-hitting full of information episodes for you. So when you’re listening to now 176 and next week’s episode one 77 and next week’s episode, I want to talk about ad spend budget strategy. Wrapping up here, we’ve talked about a lot of things. So we, you have mentioned the three types of businesses that are really great candidates to advertise on LinkedIn. The first one you said B2B,
so lead generation for high lifetime value. So if what they’re selling is over 15,000 lifetime or greater, you also said higher education MBA. So let’s kind of jam on that for a little bit. What type of businesses would fall into that category? The higher education? Yeah. Are you actually talking about institutions advertising or people who want to reach individuals connected institutions?
I just don’t know that I’m understanding that correctly. Oh, I gotcha. Yeah. At the institution itself. So you imagine like a local university to you who they have an MBA program that they’d like to fill up with students. LinkedIn would let you target and obviously customize for your own organization, but you can say, I want to target anyone who has a bachelor’s but doesn’t yet have a master’s or PhD who got their degree in English or journalism and has at least five years of experience in the workforce.
Oh, wow. Yeah, I can see how powerful that, that would be. A hundred percent. Okay. And then, um, along those same lines, there are many companies that are educational platforms. So, you know, we talk about the knowledge commerce industry. You and I were both in that industry. You know, sharing knowledge, teaching individuals how to up their game,
increase their skills. So could this also apply to platforms, online platforms and online companies that are teaching skills to individuals who also then need to target or want to target people who are already at a certain educational level who might not be, you know, an official institution. Oh, for sure. Yeah. And the targeting on LinkedIn is so great for so many people.
What it usually comes down to though is the cost. Yeah. Because last time we talked, I think the average cost per click on LinkedIn was six to $9. It’s now eight to 11 because you know, increased competition over time. Interesting. Okay. So it’s going up. Okay. Yeah. And I want to talk about that more in the next show too.
Okay. So, um, and then the third person obviously is recruiting, hiring. That’s an easy no brainer. So those are the three types of businesses that are really ideal to advertise on LinkedIn. We dove into your acronym, your audience message, offer your ammo acronym and making sure that as a business you have all of those nailed down before you start your ad campaign.
You talked about the importance of having like simple ads, not these fancy video ads, simple ads with images that are thumb stopping images with. Great copy. Before we kind of wrap up here, because I literally, I have so many questions for your age and I just appreciate you so much, so much being on the show and just allowing me to ask my completely uneducated LinkedIn advertising questions to you and I know there are so many people like me that just want to know more and so I’m thrilled about this before somebody starts even thinking about advertising on LinkedIn.
And just to kind of wrap up this first episode, can you just explain to us what they really need to have set up in place as far as a profile or a company page? You know what I mean? I mean, so I know we have a, we just actually started our Sweetlife company page. I’ve had my LinkedIn personal profile for, I don’t even know as long as I could have had it,
you know, years over a decade for sure. What do you need to have in place before you can even dive into this or what do you recommend? Yes, excellent question. So there are four different ad formats that you can use on LinkedIn. The main ad format that shows up in the newsfeed, that’s the one that I recommend everyone start with.
That’s the only one that requires a company page to be associated with it. The rest, you can use any of them, not in your newsfeed types of ads without a page. But what’s so interesting to me is you don’t have to make sure your pages rockstar for your ads to perform well. The only things that people see from your company page in your ad are the company name,
the logo, and the number of followers. So as long as your number of followers is not like an embarrassingly low number like ours, I’m looking at mine right now, it has 732 followers and I might go, okay, I might try to get that up before I really start hitting for the fences or anything, but as long as you’re not embarrassed by that number,
you can show ads and the vast majority of people won’t ever come to your page to check out anything else you’ve shared or really anything else about your company. They’ll do what your ad is asking them to do, which is come to my landing page and fill out my form. So don’t sweat too much over what is on your company page. Just fill it out with the basics and make sure it doesn’t look embarrassing to you and then then your ads will perform as you create the ads.
Got it. Okay, so that means I shouldn’t be running ads probably yet from my company page because I think we have three followers. Yeah, your 700 is embarrassing them by three. Well, the nice thing is you can cheat a little bit because LinkedIn released about six months ago. The ability to invite your connections so every day you can go in and invite up to,
I think it’s 25 of your connections to follow your company page every day. Go in, invite 25 people that you know are great for your target audience or just good friends. Invite them and start padding that number over time and that way you wouldn’t be embarrassed about. That’s so funny. My assistant Kelly, she’s my assistant Kelly there. Let’s just add that to your daily job tests every day.
She’s literally rolling her eyes right now while she listens to this show. She’s like, great, thanks April, but what? What I’m hearing is you don’t have to have a business page. You can still run LinkedIn ads without having a company page set up. Yup, yup. You can still run message ads which go to their inbox and on the desktop you can run both ad formats that are just hanging out over in the right rail.
One’s called text ads and one’s called dynamic ads, but you probably will want a page four, the main ad format just because it’s the best ad format for most people, but you could theoretically without, Okay. Yeah, for sure. I want to type for many more questions about that in the next show. And then just the profile in general, like a general everybody’s general LinkedIn profile.
You said few people actually come to either check out the company or the actual profile of the person running the ad, so it doesn’t seem like we have to have this rockstar profile in place either. So somebody who’s relatively new to LinkedIn or who’s really never taken the time to grow their LinkedIn connection could from what you’re saying is is correct. Do real well with ads,
just basically because that doesn’t seem to be a deciding factor on how the ads convert. Yes, and in addition to that, you can’t actually even link to the profile of the person creating the ads. So quite often we’ll have a client who they personally don’t have a profile and so to work together they set one up and it’s bare bones, I mean no picture,
barely their name, but we can still run ads for them because their company page is okay or even run some of those other ad formats that don’t require the page. So yeah, don’t let that stuff stop you from being able to run ads. Awesome. Thank you so much AIJ for being here. This is sweet life business podcast, episode number 176 all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 76 and for you guys to connect with AIG AIG, tell people where they can find you if they already know they want to dive into this. They don’t want to deal with figuring this out on their own as much information as we’re giving them here. It isn’t like having you hold their hand. Where can everybody find you? Awesome. Well,
because you are all listening to a podcast right now. I’m excited to announce. I actually just launched my own podcast about four months ago, so if you’re interested in going super deep into LinkedIn ads, just searching whatever podcast player you’re listening to right now, the LinkedIn ads show, and you’ll see a a bright chubby ginger point now yet or something. That’s how you’ll know it’s may and of course I’m really easy to find.
If you go to<inaudible> dot com our business website, if you fill out the form on any of those pages, you don’t go to a sales rep and you don’t get put into our newsletter. It just goes directly to my inbox and I’m not a sales guy, so feel free to reach out and I’m happy to email back and forth. Dude, you’re awesome.
Thank you so much, JJ. All right, you guys, thanks for listening. Screenshot this episode. If it helped you and uploaded to LinkedIn tag Aja, tag me in it. Let us know what you took away from this, what you benefited the most are white, you know what you learned. We really appreciate your feedback and sharing this show,
and we will talk to you again next week. Thanks for being here

Episode 170: 7 Steps To Optimize Your Facebook Business Page – with Sarah Tomes and April Beach

Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join our FREE community!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Any business that wants to optimize their Facebook business page and has spent time winging it. Entrepreneurs who aren’t sure how to get more engagement on Facebook. 80% of businesses out there who are missing the basics that could be costing them thousands. 


If you’ve created a Facebook Business Page, but you aren’t sure EXACTLY how to use it, you’re not alone. Over 80% of small businesses we meet with don’t have the basics of their page set up and could be losing thousands. In this week’s show Sarah Tomes, our in house Facebook Ads expert is delivering “7 Steps To Make Sure Your Facebook Page Is Good To Go”.


  1. How to create a catchy title banner that establishes you as a leader
  2. How and what you should be linking to in your posts (and why)
  3. What CTAs (calls to action) to use and which ones are a “no-no”
  4. The difference between Boosted Posts and Facebook Ads and how to choose the right one. 

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 57: How to Increase Organic Reach Through Facebook – with Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 60: Overcome Video Fears & Master Facebook LIVE – with Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 125: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 1 – Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 126: What You Absolutely Must Know About Facebook And Instagram Marketing Right Now – Part 2 – Sarah Tomes SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 149: Using Facebook and Instagram Ads On A Budget, To Get Your Online Presence Ready For The New Year- with Sarah Tomes Todd Herman on Instagram SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe age Hey, you guys and walk back to the show. I’m really glad you’re here. We’re diving into a topic that we’ve talked about many times previously on this show, and this is about leveraging Facebook and Instagram ads to grow your business. But specifically, what we find is a lot of people actually don’t have their Facebook business page set up in a way that’s gonna optimize the money that you’re spending on ads.
So I asked Sarah tomes, Who’s our in house? Facebook and Instagram Add strategist and the founder of Tomes Social Media to come back into the show into chat with us. Now, this is a perfect episode for those of you guys who you haven’t established Facebook page. But you either don’t know how to use it. You kind of just threw it up there, and you’re not exactly sure the features in there and how they can help you connect with your audience or grow your audience or you have a page,
but you haven’t leveraged the features like Facebook pixels, and you might have been spending money boosting posts with no results whatsoever. So for those guys who haven’t established business Facebook Page, this is a great show for you to make sure that you’re using the right. And then it’s also a great show for you if you have never set up your Facebook business page before we talk about the difference between business pages and personal pages. And no, some people use personal pages. Four business activities when Sarah actually breaks down.
So we’re talking about seven steps to set up your Facebook business page and to start connecting with your perfect audience and growing your audience. We’re diving into all these steps today on the show. If you haven’t listened to the show before. Welcome. I’m April Beach on my business development strategist and host here at the Suite Life podcast in all of the show notes that we are talking about. So the links in a recap of the show can be found by cruising over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 170 because this is episode number 170 now,
a quick note about the recording of this show. Right now, all of our kids were home. We’re home. My husband’s home. All three of my kids are home. Sarah’s home, her boys air home. Everybody’s home, which means that the Internet is pretty overwhelmed with band wit. And so we actually had trouble connecting and getting a great WiFi signal to record this particular podcast episode. And so because of that, instead of throwing the baby out with the bath water, we actually recorded this episode for you still in our sky platform but through a Skype phone call instead of the usual video that we do so a mind sound a little bit different than our regular recordings.
Thank you for bearing with us. Thanks for continuing to tune into the show, and I just wanted to give you guys a little heads up of it. Sounds a little different audio wise. It’s because we had to improvise, and that’s what we d’oh we’re entrepreneurs, right? But what we do, we figure out how to make it work, and we make it work. So we certainly did that on today’s show, and for those of you guys who have any questions about Facebook ads. How to set up your Facebook page in any of the things that Sarah’s talking about today On this show,
I invite you to join us in our free small business and women entrepreneur community over on Facebook. By tapping sweet life community dot com, you can just enter that in. It will redirect you to our Facebook community. We love to connect with you there. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Hey, you guys, we are back again with Sarah tomes. Sarah is the sweet life company, so she’s our companies. Go to Facebook and Instagram ads strategist. She’s the very best of what she does.
And she frankly, she has to be to deal with us because I do a really good job of killing Facebook ads all the time. And for years, Sarah has been the one to make sure online ad strategy. It’s just X selling. She’s also the one that works with all of our clients, and so she’s always has her sleeves rolled up in our communities, and today we’re diving into how thio make your business Facebook page visible, so you’re attracting the right leads. How to use adds to connect with the right leads what the post went to post it and really overall,
how to set up your Facebook business page to be completely optimized in acting the exact way that you want it. Thio As we’re going through here, we’re gonna talk about a lot of things, But we want you to know that if you have questions, cruise over and join us in our community. This is a totally free community for women, small business owners and entrepreneurs to join. Sarah is in there all the time. She’s always giving, giving, giving. So if you guys have a question about anything we’ve talked about today,
join us over at sweet life community dot com and we’ll be there to support you. So, Sarah, welcome to the show. Besides, being are like superhero when it comes to Facebook and instagram ads, can you give yourself another introduction as faras? What? What else? You d’oh! Oh, hey, it’s good to be here again. I love doing these podcasts with you. It’s like girlfriend time so fun. I specialize in Facebook and instagram ads. You guys know that Facebook and Instagram with same company just a little bit different platform.
I focus on them because they it work. They’re the most authentic way to connect your brand to the people that you want to connect with as a brand. The arrow eyes are still amazing, and I just really enjoy it. And I think the thing that I like about it the most is I, you know, had a lot of trouble with it at first because it is so complicated. I think social media is just like people don’t know what to d’oh. It’s overwhelming, and I have been able to figure it out.
Make it easy. And I love helping people get through it and make it easy to understand. And I loving instead your community because it’s love answering questions and making sure that people don’t feel, you know, like they’re asking something that’s that’s silly. And there’s no silly questions inside of there. So that’s why you need to come join us so you can get all the help inside. Yeah, thank you so much. And you do you pour into us and what’s really interesting for those of you guys that are our listeners to the show?
You always listen to a state, sir, has been on a ton of these episodes, and so we’ve been talking about Facebook for years. She’s always in here giving, as you guys know, but one of things we find is that these questions that might feel like stupid questions in the beginning these questions don’t just come from new entrepreneurs. These are questions that established brands established companies that do have a social media presence that are either not understanding how to leverage that. Like all of these,
these questions come from all directions. So it’s not just you, and she is not joking you when she’s telling you she’s there to pour into you and help.
So thank you so much. So today on the show, we’re talking about seven steps to set up your Facebook business page and make sure it’s optimized,
meaning it’s gonna track the right people to buy from. You build a relationship from you and to establish your business,
your brand, how you want to be established into your space. So let’s go ahead and dive into the seven different steps.
We’re gonna roll on some of these here together, so the 1st 1 is obviously setting up your business page.
Some of the people that we talk Thio use their personal page as a business, so shot a little bit about that.
And then let’s talk about actually setting up a Facebook business page and and really, how to go about that?
Yes, if you have a business, you need to have a business page. You don’t want to be running your business from your personal page.
It’s maybe not technically against Facebook’s terms of service, but they don’t like it. I’ve heard of accounts or personal Facebook.
Page is getting shut down for conducting business because people don’t want to see that. You know, I I know that my friends don’t want to hear about Facebook ads.
They could care less, right, so you need to set up a business page. It’s very easy to do,
but it also has to have a lot of elements to make sure that your audience is connecting with you.
You have to remember that it’s essentially like a business card these days. You have to have one. You need to have a website.
You need to have a Facebook page. People are starting to really need to be on Instagram. Now we’re finding through studies that people sometimes go to Facebook instead of Google if they are interested in your business,
so you want to make sure that it really represents who you are. So the first thing that you need to establish is a cover photograph that’s the one of the top,
the long photograph for most businesses. I think it’s great Thio be focusing on now, like what you’re launching,
what product you’re pushing, what course you’re pushing, what often you’re pushing. That’s a really great way to do it.
If you don’t want to do that, makes something that’s very clear. Concise has maybe a little bit of text,
but not too much something that’s easy to read. But my absolute favorite timeline is not. A photo is actually a video that’s a fairly new feature to Facebook,
where you can put a video instead of a photographed anything of you doing anything looking like a boss, like speaking at an event that would be great.
Another way to take advantage of that timeline photo is, if you have any press accolades, that’s place to put it,
cause someone in Milan a little be like Oh, this business has been featured in this magazine or this publication,
and it gives credibility to your business. So the other thing that I really see people make a big mistake is your cover photo.
So it’s a very small right, and a lot of people will put like a group shot of her team and you can’t see it or they’ll put a version of their logo.
That’s really not easy to read if you were representing your company. If you’re the peace of your company,
use a professional shot. Use that same shot across all of your social media channels so that you’re easily recognizable,
whether someone’s on Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram or Facebook. And I think April you had a good example of somebody who does that really well,
is it Todd Herman. Yeah, Todd Herman does a great job of that. If you guys follow Todd Herman on Instagram or even unlinked in its his head shot,
and then it’s a bright yellow background. So it’s super consistent, you know, across the board on all the social media platforms.
But then it’s also really eye catching its basic. It isn’t, you know, elaborate. It’s his head shot with a yellow background,
and it is by far like the best example that I have seen. If somebody doing that really well yet,
yeah, that’s a really important thing to do. And just make sure that it’s very easy to see.
You want to even look at it on a mobile phone, not just your desktop, cause it’s going to be even smaller there.
And then it’s even smaller on Instagram. Very, very small, right? Right. And you know,
one of the things that you’ve said to us before is that some people’s logos were really small. And so let’s talk about the use of an actual logo it in that place and what you recommend.
Whatever version of your logo is the easiest to read in the most recognizable that has, like the most color is the one that you’re gonna want to use.
You don’t want to use something that’s really, really busy because no one will be able to recognize you across the different channels.
Yeah, thank you so much for saying that I love it. I love the video idea, certainly,
and I think that would be very eye catching if I went to somebody’s Facebook page. I would certainly stop and watch what they’re doing in the video,
for sure. So that’s step one step from our two. People want to know When should they post how frequently you know what time of day it really?
What content should they be putting out there? What’s your take on that right now? Because this changes.
I mean, let’s face it. We’ve recorded the show similar to this, and we’ll record more down the road and it could be totally different based on what’s happening right now,
which is why it’s so important to stay on top of these things. Well, what’s going on right now is that Internet traffic is way up,
right, because we’re at the time of this recording were all at home working s O. This is the ultimate time to get in front of your audience,
So typically I would recommend about three times a week. I don’t really think it’s worth it to get worked up and feel like you have to post like,
five times a day. You don’t. You just need to post quality content, and one thing that is very important is to make sure that if you’re posting and you’re letting somebody go off of the Facebook platform that they’re going to one of your assets,
So they’re going to your website. They’re going to your blogged. They’re going to Anything that you own is better than sending them to an article.
I see a lot of business owners they like, Oh wow, I found this great article on entrepreneur dot com Then entrepreneur dot com Get your traffic and they own your traffic.
So if you could send them to your website, that is so much better. I’m not saying you don’t You can’t post things like that,
but really try to make a habit of not doing that very much. Another type of post that is the most valuable is video posts,
and especially if it could be video of you or what’s going on inside of your business. Video is just the most wonderful way to connect with people.
We all grew up watching television, and we connect. We does national. We connect through video. That’s what we do.
And Facebook loves video, and they we’ll give you preference if you use it. And I know April and I’ve had discussions about how difficult it can be too comfortable around video.
But this is the time to do it. And you know what? You could even come inside of our group in post video and no one’s gonna judge you.
You can come in like, bone up everything right? I love that you just said that. So before this recording,
I just got off the phone with a perspective client for our business that wants to work with us and where she was sharing about how difficult it is to really get the routine of posting video.
And so let me share with you guys to some of the stuff that I just said to her. So when you’re recording a video,
whether it’s live or it’s a pretty apart of video, I want you to just imagine that you’re talking to a one person like your ideal client.
If you’re sitting there and you’re looking at your camera, you’re looking at your laptop and you recorded a video,
and it gets really overwhelming when you hit record. It’s because you’re imagining that you’re speaking to the potential masses,
you know, and it gets really intimidating. You kind of forget what you’re saying so The reality is,
is when you first go live, You guys, nobody’s gonna be there watching you. You might get one view here,
one of you there because people aren’t used to you going live. That’s normal. It happens to everybody.
The more you do that, the more people are gonna be like, Oh, hey, great. You know,
Julie’s going live in and I can’t wait to see what she’s posting today or you know, any other video.
So, you know, first of all, like just bring it back to the basics. Just imagine you’re talking to one person.
We could do a whole nother. I won’t continue going on attention on that, but I love what Sarah said to So we have,
like, practice going live sessions in our Facebook community, and that is literally for us to go in there and practice going live in the community before you go.
11. Your business page. You’re totally welcome to do that in our free entrepreneur community. People do it all the time,
and they’re like, Oh, my gosh, where do I hit this button and what I do and what I look like And can you guys hear me,
Okay. It’s totally a place for you to practice, so we just want to share with you that you’re welcome to do that.
Okay, So step number three is asked people to take action on your post. So what kind of action are we talking about?
Like, what does that mean for people that might not be aware? Well, you just want to remember the Facebook is a social platform.
And if you have social interactions with your audience, you’re going to be rewarded in the algorithm. So if I post something and I’m starting to get a lot of likes Ah,
lot of people are commenting. They’re sharing the post than that says to Facebook. Okay, this is a good post.
We’re going to start showing it more. Ah, lot of people make the mistake of saying, you know,
like, comment and share, and that’s actually something Facebook does not like. So you just want to ask questions.
You want to get them to have conversations with you and each other When they comment on your post, make sure that you reply thoughtfully.
I see so many businesses just with very lame replies that are probably you know some sort of pot or employees.
That’s not getting them to engage. But if they answer a question, asked him a question. Keep the ball going,
make it like a volley and that we will really get things going now when you were doing a Facebook alive and you can say something like,
you know, press the heart button. If you agree, that’s fine to do. And that’s I think a really good strategy to get your Facebook live going is to get them to comment,
get them to hit that heart button, and that will trigger the algorithm to give you the more organic reach.
Yeah, love that, too. So the difference between calling Tau action, like on a live stream versus calling the action on a on a static poster video.
Okay, so, you know, you had an example, and I think it’s important to share examples to reassure some,
but like an interior designer and the post that she was doing, I love that example. Can you share that hurt here?
Just so people really know what it is that you’re talking about? Like the color of the foursome. Yeah.
Say, if you were redecorating your office and you were trying to decide what color to paint your walls or whatever.
Asked them Thio give their opinion cause that will connect you to them. It makes the algorithm decided that they like the post and the more people will see the post.
So stuff like that is fun. Like I really like when businesses do post like that where you can give an opinion.
And it’s a really great way for you to ask your audience questions on what’s going on with them. I think that you can ask them thio like Post where they’re working from today.
Like opposed to picture. Show me. Show me your virtual office like you re a picture of your animal is your co worker you just get creative with?
Yeah, totally. I’m gonna go do all those right now because everybody’s home right now. Okay. So step number four is get verified.
So talk to us about what does it mean to be a verified account? And who needs this? Yeah.
So when I talk to people about getting verified, they think about the blue badge or the blue checkmark on instagram.
That’s for public figures and celebrities and global brands. That’s not what we’re talking about right now. Getting verified is a process that you go through because Facebook wants pages on Facebook to be authentic and trustworthy.
We know that there are so many fake pages. Are there pages that have started and they just they’re dead.
So they want businesses that are trustworthy and what you dio is you go to the security center on your Facebook page.
That’s like where all of your privacy settings are. And there’s a section in there to get verified, and it depends on what type of business you have.
You’re a brick and mortar business, and you have a telephone that’s registered. It’s a really simple, just verification process with your telephone.
If you were like an online business, like most of us probably are, it usually requires that you,
like, upload your business documents like your LLC documents, and then sometimes they’ll ask for, like a website domain proof of ownership.
It takes about like four or five days for to get verified. But then, once you do, you have access to Facebook product’s developer futures,
and Facebook does a lot of really cool focus groups where they will pay you. They’ll give you gift cards.
You could be part of a study you could be part of. Ah, Beta testing sometimes will fly you out to Facebook headquarters.
Like if they notice that your pages doing some amazing things and it’s verified, You can really do some amazing things with Facebook.
So it’s just one of those things. Like while we’re around, we’ve got a huge to do list that we’re all going Drew right now.
Just do it. It takes, like, 15 minutes, and it’s really worth your time. And they don’t say that it increases your reach,
but I think it really does. If you have a verified business, okay, thank you so much for all those details.
All right. And then step number five is diving into creating your about section on your Facebook business page.
What are your best practices for that section? So that section is statistically the place people go when they land on your Facebook business page.
So you need to put a lot of thought and ever into it. And right now it really does allow you to pictures.
And there it allows you to write quite a bit of copy. It used to be very simple. So now is the time to really,
like showcase what your company stands for and why whoever’s landed should be interested in what’s in it for that.
It’s also a very unique opportunity for you to put a link to your Optima or to schedule a call or whatever it is in your business that people would want to know to get started.
So really, show your vision in there and get creative and connect with your community. In that about Paige,
that’s really, really important. Super. I love that love that so much and yes, posting the lead to the link to the lead magnet or get started or whatever it’s,
it’s absolutely perfect place to put that. And I don’t think people are utilized in That is a matter of fact.
I have been looking just kind of casually, and I haven’t really seen very many businesses doing that, and the way that it could be Okay,
so that was number five. Now six and seven, we’re going to dive into here. We can’t go in depth about them,
but there are some really important things that you want to share with our audience about these issues. We’re talking about Facebook ads,
and we’re talking about Facebook pixels. Let’s start with the Facebook pixel and really what it is, why businesses need it.
And we’ve talked about this numerous times on the show before. For years we’ve talked about the Facebook pixel,
and yet so many companies are missing this fairly easy, important step. Yes, I mean, I would say 80% of companies don’t have it installed,
which is mind blowing. All it is is a pixel code that you, uh, install very easily onto your website.
Used to kind of be a pain in the butt to do. But Facebook now integrates with, like squarespace,
WordPress wicks most of the major platforms to allow it to be just really a click of a few buttons.
You just goto business dot facebook dot com and you click on events, and that will take you to your pixel,
and it basically just takes you through the process and what it does. It’s that little piece of code that’s in charge of all the things that Facebook does that are totally creepy.
It follows you around the Internet. It tracks where you’re going, what you’re doing, what your habits are,
which is completely creepy. And it’s something that we all just like about Facebook, but as an advertiser and is a business.
It is a dream because you have so much intelligence on what your user is doing. So if you have it installed in your sight and you go to run Facebook ads,
you know exactly who has landed on what page, and you can re target them and do a lot of really creative re marketing.
And it’s, you know, a 5 to 10 minute process to get it installed. You may already have it installed.
If you had a decent Web developer, we hope that they put it on there for you. But inside of the community,
there’s a tutorial to figure out whether or not it’s installed on. And if it’s not installed, I can help you walk up the process.
Yeah, so definitely don’t hesitate toe to reach out and again, you can join us. It’s totally free community,
you guys. This is where we connect with other like minded women business owners. We love it, and Sarah’s in their relentlessly giving,
importing into this community So there is a video tutorial, and they’re showing you how to check whether or not your code is installed.
This is basic business, honestly, marketing 101 And I don’t know, maybe marketing companies charge for this,
but I love Sarah. She’s always giving first. And you know, we believe these are kind of basic things that you guys should have in orderto leverage your business account on Facebook and grow your business.
So cruise over and join us in sweet life community dot com. It’ll redirect you to that Facebook group,
and you’re you’re welcome to go in there, find that pixel post you can search in the community for that and the poster questions and tags era and them.
And she’s always in their connecting with you guys. So let’s talk about Facebook ads now. The most important question that I hear you get when you’re in doing business trainings in our community and everywhere else is why can’t I just boost my post?
Facebook makes it so easy to boost my post. And really, what is the difference between a boosted post and a Facebook ad?
Well, the boosted poster a very easy way to get your ads in front of an audience, but I found that typically they don’t do very well.
And the really big difference is you can’t see the data is to what’s going on, because if you’re starting an ad and it’s not working,
you need to know that it’s not working in these boost interests. Just don’t give you the data that you need.
They don’t allow for the building of audiences. So what you need to do is go to business at facebook dot com and get comfortable with ads manager and build your abs inside of there.
And then that way you can split test audiences. You can split test images. You can split test copy.
You can take a look at the data, and you can say, Okay, this ad is doing awesome.
I’m going to keep it running, or you can say it’s not and you have to adjust. But boosting post is a really it’s very easy to do,
and it’s not worth your marketing dollars to do that right now. Add costs are down about 60% and it’s a very,
very, very good time to get in front of your audience because They’re listening now. So true. So true.
Okay, so let’s recap a bit. What we chatted about here today. Seven steps Thio, Optimize your Facebook business page and get in front of your perfect audience.
We talked about how to set up that page. You gave some really awesome suggestions as faras the video in the header and really,
how to establish what it is that you want your audience to know within that that was so smart. I love that number two We talked about posting times three.
We talked about asking people to take action and how to ask them, like what kind of action they should be taking,
and you should be prompting them to do based on the type of post. We also talked about getting verified and what that means utilizing the about section to the best of your business.
And your options actually grow your list through that process. And then we dove into pixels and adds, Is there anything else that people you know really need to know right now and what’s happening,
or anything to stay away from? As a business owner? Just anything else you’d like to add to this Sarah This is a really good time to really know your audience and use your intuition.
It’s a very delicate situation right now where there’s a fine line that you have to be constantly aware of.
I know that like I scheduled some of my post and I went in, I was like, Scratch that that doesn’t exactly fit.
And I think a lot of businesses air sending out emails that aren’t addressing the elephant in the room. And you have to be.
You have to be aware of that. And I really believe one thing that not everyone is a copywriter.
A messaging could be very difficult, right? But follow big brands. They have the best copy writers in the world working on how to address the elephant in the room and how to be sensitive in the right words to use right now.
So, you know, watch your commercials during her who lose sessions, see what they’re saying. Open your e mails from trusted companies and listen to what words they’re using and just be very intuitive about how you should go about things.
And I think it’s different for different companies and just be careful. But also like you know don’t necessarily be a free to sell right now.
Don’t be afraid to grow. Your email is don’t be afraid to run traffic to your website. Don’t be afraid to run ads is actually a great time while we have people on the Internet to get your business in front of all of these people.
And it’s definitely at a way lower cost than it was a week ago. So maybe have the ad dollars to spend.
This is a great time to spend it growing your audience. I love it. Thank you so much,
Sarah. Thanks for all your wisdom and seriously just giving so much to our clients and those people that aren’t our clients.
Just the the entrepreneur community is general again. A few guys would like to join us, cruise over to sweet life community dot com and plug in there on our Facebook group for us or with us.
Give yourself an introduction and then tap in to Sarah for any questions you have about this episode or any of our other episodes were both in there all the time answering business questions.
Thanks so much for being on the show and you can find all the show notes for this episode of by cruising Over to sweet life.
Podcast dot com forward slash 170 So it’s 1 70 It’s episode number 1 70 Yanda Again in the community By connecting with us.
It’s sweet life community dot com. Thanks, sir. I appreciate it. Thanks, April.
That’s all folks!

Episode 165: How To Grow Your Business With Pinterest – With April Beach and Melanie Fountain

Melanie Fountain SweetLife Entrepreneur April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those in any phase of my Lifestyle Entrepreneur System
  2. Those who have used Pinterest for their business yet and are interested in getting started

Show Highlights:

  • Pinterest expert, Melanie Fountain, will help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day and week on Pinterest
  • Why Pinterest is so powerful; especially when compared to social media platforms
  • How you can get started with your very own Pinterest marketing plan today

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community 

Resources Mentioned:

Melanie Fountain’s Website

Melanie Fountain on Pinterest

Melanie Fountain’s Facebook Group | Pinterest for Bloggers and Content Creators

Schedule Your FREE Strategy Call with Melanie Fountain



SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest

April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram 

Full Show Transcript:


you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hi, everyone, Thanks so much for tuning in with me again for another week. Here on the suite Life podcast It’s good to talk to you and connect again, and today we’re diving Maur into online marketing strategies. Last week on the show, I talked to those of you guys who have been doing a lot of work. Maybe you’re spending a lot of time on instagram or on Facebook or even on LinkedIn,
and your numbers just aren’t growing. And we dove into some really authentic marketing strategies that have worked for years and are important to keep integrating into your business to grow your following. Today we’re diving back into some of the online marketing strategies because, as a business owner in today’s day and age were all online marketers. And so it is important that we’re always continuing too deep in our online marketing skills, and so I am thrilled to be joined by a Pinterest business building expert on today’s show. Now I’ll be honest with you.
I’m not a Pinterest person. I don’t cook, so I usually tell Go after recipes. I do love looking at Pinterest for design and in home needs, but it’s not something I do on a regular basis, maybe like five times a year, So I don’t even think that actually counts at all. But we do is a business, have a Pinterest account and it always shocks me. When I go over to our Pinterest account and I see how many followers we have or how many people are noticing the content,
I often think to myself, Wow, this is a really engaged platform. I should be here more, but the truth is, we haven’t as a company. It wasn’t something that we had had on our marketing strategy and plan. And so I have the privilege of interviewing today’s guest. After this interview, I asked our guest who was amazing to sit down with myself and Kelly, who is my content quarterback for the content for the show, and we started diving into our pincher strategy, and I will tell you,
with only one week of doing the strategy that you’re gonna learn here on this show, are Pinterest percentage has risen by something crazy like 1900% engagement. It was insane. The numbers from one week of doing What Today’s guest taught us how to d’oh from today’s show. So I’m so excited to introduce you and share of these strategies with you. So today’s podcast is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur business building system. But if you have not used Pinterest before and you want to try that strategy so it doesn’t matter where you are in your business building if you haven’t built your business yet or if you’re an established scaled multi six figure company and you want to use Pinterest,
this show is for you as well. This show also is going to help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day, every single week on Pinterest. How Pinterest works, why Pinterest is powerful, especially when you compare it to other social media handles in the S e o aspects of Pinterest and how you can get started on your very own Pinterest marketing plan today. You’re gonna leave with all of those answers after this show If you’re busy and you can’t take notes of what we’re talking about,
you can find all the show notes over its sweet life. Podcast dot com forward slash 1 65 All right. You guys were here with Melanie Fountain, and she is a Pinterest guru. We’ve been wanting to bring interest experts on the show because you guys are asking for it. We as a company, we want to know more about growing and connection with our listener to followers rip interest. So I’m super stoked about this show. We’re talking about everything interests who should be on Pinterest, how to activate your business and Pinterest.
You know how to grow your list through Pinterest how to get started software scheduling all of the I would save basics. But I’ve been through, you know, we’ve been through this outline of what we’re gonna talk about before, and it is foundational information, but really, really powerful. So I’m very excited to have Melanie on the show. Please introduce yourself and let everybody know who you are. Hi, everybody. I’m so excited to be on here today. Thank you, April for having me. My name is Melanie Fountain.
I am a blogger and Pinterest strategist. So I work with bloggers, content creators and business owners that want to get their contents scene without paying ah ton of money on ads or having to worry so much about website S E 02 ranking Google and that heavy competition. And we strategize based on their content. And really, it’s kind of let the little guy be seen. And it’s possible to market yourself without paying a lot of money and add. I love it. Okay. And how long have you been doing this?
And what’s your history? How did you get end to doing this? I love hearing everybody’s stories, and I know a lot of our listeners resonate with our guest stories. So tell us just really quickly some background of how you started doing this. Sure. Well, you know what? This month is my year anniversary of really calling myself an entrepreneur. And I started as a virtual assistant, so as a general virtual assistant, just wanting to get out of the regular 9 to 5. I’m a single mom and I live in California,
and I really wanted to, you know, you feel like you’re missing out on life when you’re working your life away for a company. But you know, you’re really not going to grow in. So I decided to sign up for a virtual assistant course, and then it kind of went like wildfire from there, and I fell in love with Pin Trust and the visual side event. But then the you know, the strategy behind it, the marketing and I started working with business owners and found that I actually had a talent in it.
And so I actually started as a Pinterest strategist about nine months ago now. But since then I’ve been able to work with over a dozen business owners, helping them grow Pinterest and strategize. And in May of 2019 I was able to quit my job. And so I’ve been working for myself for the last nine months. Net war Basically, since I transitioned over to nation down into Pinterest marketing and here we are that’s such on the awesome story.
Oh, my gosh, that’s a chance. My story and that story alone like, forget we’re gonna talk about pictures today.
That story alone, a lot of our listeners are like I can’t wait to be there and that’s what I’m working towards.
And so it’s really cool, especially in such a short period of time hearing those awesome results, and I will just kind of add in there.
The reason why Melanie probably had such amazing results is because she needs down like she is that pinchers expert.
If she was like I’m the V eight, all people in all things, I can guarantee you her business wouldn’t be where it is today.
So we talk about Nietzschean a lot on this podcast. She is a perfect example. That’s so I’m super excited that you’re on the show today,
So we’re gonna talk about Pinterest everything. First of all, give us some background about Pinterest. What,
actually is it cause it’s not a social media platform? Right, Right? Exactly. So Pinterest is commonly known as a social media platform,
but what it actually is is a search engine. It’s a visual Google, and more than that, it’s a discovery engine.
When people go on Pinterest, they want to be inspired. They want to discover they want to learn,
but they don’t always know what it is exactly. They’re searching for soap. Interest is there for people to discover what it is they’re searching for.
And a lot of the time from a business perspective. They’re there to discover you were there to discover your business and the value that you have to provide.
And Pinterest has over 300 million active people monthly on Pinterest, searching for businesses like the businesses that listen to this podcast.
That’s crazy. That’s somebody over multi 1,000,000,000 searches every month. And and that’s why I’m a little bit we’re gonna talk about s CEO and how to be found on pin trust,
of course, but it’s such a powerful platform. And on Lee now, are people really starting to discover the power of interest?
That’s so cool. Okay, so one of our listeners, you know, she’ll be out there saying,
Okay, that’s cool. But I’m on all these other social media platforms and you know, I’m strapped for time,
So just reiterating what you just said. It is a surgeon, Jen. It is searchable by Google,
and it’s actually on Lee search engine that we know of today that actually is searchable by Google. Is that correct?
YouTube is as well, but that’s right. Yeah, So there’s YouTube Interesting Google and those are the big guys when they have to search engine.
And that’s the funny thing. And I’m glad that you mentioned that April because when you’re searching something in Google,
a lot of the articles and images that come up are also on Pinterest. So when you’re on Pinterest,
you’re kind of killing two birds with one stone, right? Yeah, you’re definitely increasing CEO getting to page one and all that stuff.
You were gonna talk about that? Okay, so who should be on Pinterest? If you are creating consistent content,
you should be on Pinterest and it’s really a simple is that you don’t have to have a blawg. You know it’s helpful.
Absolutely. But if you’re a podcaster, if you create videos if you write article, you know, if you’re creating content,
Pinterest is where you should be. Okay, awesome and some things like Okay, cool. How do I get started?
I talked to people about the different stream like a business account and a regular account is Pinterest have both diff